JP6424922B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball fired by a player operating a launch device etc. enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, and a display device The variable display of the pattern is performed on the display screen of the screen, and when the winning result is obtained by the lottery, the special stop pattern of the combination of the specific pattern etc. is displayed on the display screen and the special game state advantageous to the player The structure which transfers to is known (for example, refer Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2005-074175).

JP 2005-074175 A

  Here, pachinko machines and the like are required to increase attention to games, and there is still room for improvement from this point of view.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably enhancing the degree of attention of a game.

  Hereinafter, means for solving the above problems will be described.

The invention according to claim 1 is
Game time execution means for causing the game notification operation to be started by the predetermined notification means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and ending the game operation as the predetermined stop result;
And determining means for determining an operation continuation period of a specific operation to be executed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means according to the operation situation of the game circulation operation by the game times execution means.
The specific operation is started based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, and the specific operation is ended as a predetermined stop result,
The specific condition is satisfied in part when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
Specifying means capable of specifying whether or not the specific condition is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition before the specific condition is satisfied;
A grasping means for grasping the remaining operation continuation period of the game circulation operation under execution based on the specification that the specific condition is satisfied by the specification means in the situation where the game circulation operation is being executed When,
Equipped with
When the determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied by the specifying means in a situation where the game switching action is being performed, the remaining operation duration of the game switching action that the grasping means has grasped Means for determining the operation continuation period of the specific operation based on the establishment of the specified specified condition as one of the plurality of predetermined periods set in advance, when It is characterized by having.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably enhancing the degree of attention of a game.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a perspective view which disassembles and shows the main structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A) It is the schematic of the action | operation opening in a closed state, It is the schematic of the operation | work opening in a (b) open state. (A), (b) is the schematic for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. (A)-(e) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a special character. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for the etc. lottery. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for special figures, (b)-(d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for special drawings. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the fluctuation display time table for special figures, (c)-(e) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the fluctuation display time table for common drawing. (A) It is an explanatory view for explaining a common drawing allotment distribution table referred to at the time of low frequency support mode, (b) It is an explanatory view for explaining a common drawing allotment distribution table referred to at the time of high frequency support mode is there. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a drawing normal control control processing. It is a flow chart which shows acquisition processing of reservation information on the side of a drawing. It is a flowchart which shows a common drawing change start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process in common drawing fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows a process in common drawing determination. It is a flow chart which shows special figure special electric power control processing. It is a flowchart which shows acquisition processing of reservation information by the side of a special figure. It is a flow chart which shows special figure change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows data setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows acquisition information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special-charge termination process. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation determination processing performed with a sound and light control apparatus. (A), (b) is an explanatory view for explaining an effect pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows an effect replacement process. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol replacement process according to timing. It is a timing chart for explaining the relation between a common drawing and a special drawing. It is a flow chart which shows acquisition processing of reservation information on the side of a drawing in a 2nd embodiment. (A) It is a flowchart which shows a common drawing change start process, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the common display change display time table at the time of a ceiling. It is a flowchart which shows a process in common drawing fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows acquisition information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect replacement process. It is a timing chart for explaining the relation between a common drawing and a special drawing. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for a lottery etc. in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows acquisition processing of reservation information on the side of a drawing. (A) It is a flowchart which shows a common drawing change start process, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the common display change display time table at the time of a ceiling. It is a flowchart which shows acquisition information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an effect determination process. In the fourth embodiment, (a) is a front view showing the configuration of the game board, (b) is a schematic view of the through gate in the induction state, (c) the through gate in the non-induction state FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for the etc. lottery. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for special drawings, (b), (c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for special drawings. (A) It is an explanatory view for explaining a common drawing allotment distribution table referred to at the time of low frequency support mode, (b) It is an explanatory view for explaining a common drawing allotment distribution table referred to at the time of high frequency support mode is there. (A) It is a flow chart which shows acquisition processing of reservation information by the side of a drawing, and (b) It is an explanatory view for explaining a reservation display lottery table. It is the schematic for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a common drawing change start process. It is a flowchart which shows acquisition processing of reservation information by the side of a special figure. It is a flowchart which shows a special-charge termination process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect determination process. It is a timing chart for explaining the relation between a common drawing and a special drawing. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of a game. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the connection which can be anticipated after that in the condition where the number of passage required to a ceiling differs. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of acquisition processing of reservation information by the side of a common drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of acquisition information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of acquisition processing of reservation information by the side of a common drawing.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 2, the structure in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is abbreviate | omitted for convenience.

  The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in a forward direction. The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting a plurality of frame members to four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential component, and the outer frame 11 may be provided on an island facility of the game hall.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 11. In detail, the inner frame 13 is pivotable forward with the left side as the pivoting base end and the right side as the pivoting tip side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be pivoted forward with the left side as a pivoting base end and the right side as a pivoting tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated backward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip end side in a front view.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function to lock the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened, and The door frame 14 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 mainly includes a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is removably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PE formed on the front of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24. As shown in FIG.

  The inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PE, and the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 guide means Guide rails are configured as. The game balls fired from the game ball launch mechanism 27 mounted below the window holes 23 in the resin base 21 are guided to the top of the game area PE by the guide rails.

  Incidentally, the game ball firing mechanism 27 includes a firing rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying game balls stored in an upper plate 66a to be described later onto the firing rail 27a, and a firing rail 27a. And a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that causes the game ball supplied to the control unit to shoot toward the guide rail. By rotating the launch operation device (or launch handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and the gaming ball is launched.

  The gaming board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, special role 33, operation opening 34, through gates 35A, 35B, variable display unit 36, and a lottery result display unit 37 for displaying various lottery results. Each is provided. The lottery result display unit 37 is provided with a special view display unit 38 as a main display unit and a spread map display unit 39 as a feature display unit. A plurality of general winning openings 31 are provided.

  Even if the balls enter through gates 35A and 35B, the payout of the game balls is not executed. On the other hand, when entering the general winning opening 31, special power winning device 32, special combination 33, and operating opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, with regard to the number of the winning balls, when entering the special character 33 occurs and when entering the operating opening 34, the payout of the three winning balls is executed, and the general winning is achieved. When entry to the mouth 31 occurs and entry to the special power prize device 32 occurs, the payout of the ten prize balls is executed.

  However, the number of prize balls may be arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls may be different such that the number of prize balls applied to the operation opening 34 is larger than the number of prize balls applied to the special character 33. The configuration may be the same as or more than at least one of the general winning opening 31 and the special power winning device 32. Further, the number of winning balls applied to the special electric power winning device 32 may be larger than that of other winning balls.

  In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and game balls that did not enter the various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 24a. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 24b are implanted to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  Here, entering the ball means that the gaming ball passes through the predetermined opening, and not only the aspect of being ejected from the gaming area PE after passing through the opening, but also from the gaming area PE after passing through the opening Also included are modes that are not discharged. However, in the following description, in order to distinguish clearly from the entry of the game ball to the out port 24a, to the general winning a prize port 31, the special power prize winning device 32, the special role 33, the operation port 34 and the through gate 35A, 35B. The entry of the game ball is also expressed as a winning.

  A variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PE. Due to the peripheral edge of the variable display unit 36 projecting forward of the pachinko machine 10 beyond the surface of the game board 24, an area is defined in which the game balls launched to the game area PE can flow down. Specifically, an upper area PE1 which is an area above the predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PE, and a lower area than the upper area PE1 which is continuous with the variable display unit 36 A left region PE2 which is a left region, and a right region PE3 which is a region which is continuous below the upper region PE1 and which is a region to the right of the variable display unit 36, and left and right regions PE2 and PE3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower area PE4 which is a lower area than the variable display unit 36, which is continuous with the lower side.

  When the player operates the firing operation device 28 in the first range of rotation amount, which is less than the reference rotation amount, as the first firing operation, the gaming ball is on the left side of the lateral center position in the upper area PE1. Flow out. In this case, the gaming balls flow down in the order of the upper area PE1 → the left area PE2 → the lower area PE4. On the other hand, the player operates the discharge operation device 28 in the second range of rotation amount equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount as the second discharge operation, so that the upper side area PE1 is on the right of the lateral center position. The game balls run off. In this case, the gaming balls flow downward in the order of the upper area PE1 → the right area PE3 → the lower area PE4. That is, the player can play the game ball to flow down the left area PE2 of the left area PE2 and the right area PE3 by adjusting the turning operation amount of the launch operation device 28, and the right area It is possible to play the game so that the game ball flows down PE3.

  The special role product 33 is a winning device provided with two winning holes (special winning hole 52, general winning hole 53) inside, and is installed from the left area PE2 to the lower area PE4. The special character 33 has an elongated passage case 33b provided in a projecting state on the front side of the board of the game board 24, and the game ball PE which flows down the game area PE at the upper end of the passage case 33b. A ball passage port 33a through which the game player can pass is provided, and a game ball passage area R is formed below the ball passage port 33a. The ball passage port 33a constitutes the inlet of the special character 33, and is provided in the left side area PE2. The ball passage port 33a opens upward, and no member for opening and closing is provided. And, in the situation where the game ball is fired in the same manner, the passage frequency of the ball passage opening 33a (also the passage probability of the through gate 35A) is constant without depending on the game state. In the passage case 33b, the front side of the gaming machine is covered by a cover member 60 formed of an opaque material, and a winning hole, an induction member, and the like described later provided in the passage case 33b are from the front of the pachinko machine 10. It has become invisible.

  The operation opening 34 is disposed in the right side area PE3. That is, when the game operating device 28 is operated such that the game ball flows down the left area PE2, the operation opening 34 can not be won, and the game operating device 28 flows so that the game ball flows down the right area PE3. If the is operated, a prize can be won.

  The configuration of the operation opening 34 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 4A and 4B are schematic views showing the configuration of the operation port 34. FIG. The operating port 34 is provided with a universal plug 34a as a guide piece (support piece) consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  The common utility player 34a is connected to a common drive unit 34b mounted on the back side of the game board 24, and is driven by the common drive unit 34b to be in the closed state shown in FIG. 4 (a). It is arranged in either the (non-supporting state or the non-guiding state) and the open state (the supporting state or the guiding state) shown in FIG. 4 (b). In the closed state of the commercial electric utility 34a, the gaming ball can not win the operation port 34, and the commercial electric commercial 34a is opened so that the operating port 34 can be winning. By the way, when it is in the open state, the commercial electric utility product 34a protrudes to the game area PE side, and guides the winning of the operation opening 34. A detection sensor 34c is provided in the operation opening 34, and the game ball winning in the operation opening 34 is detected by the detection sensor 34c.

  It should be noted that the general-purpose electric utility 34a can be switched between a state in which the game ball is likely to generate a prize in the operation opening 34 and a state in which a prize is not easy to occur. It is good also as composition. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which switching between a state in which winning is likely to occur and a state in which winning is more difficult to occur is performed by moving or pivoting the general electric utility product 34a in the front-rear direction. Further, the general electric utility product 34a may be defective, and switching between a state in which a winning is likely to occur and a state in which a winning is less likely to occur may be performed by the displacement of the operation opening 34 itself.

  Of the left and right through gates 35A and 35B, the left through gate 35A is provided immediately above the ball passage opening 33a in the left side area PE2, and the right through gate 35B is in the operation opening 34 in the right side area PE3. The upper side is provided at a predetermined interval. In this case, when the firing operation device 28 is operated such that the game ball flows down the left area PE2, winning of the game ball to the through gate 35A becomes possible, and the game ball discharges so that the game ball flows down. When the operation device 28 is operated, winning of the game ball on the through gate 35B is possible. The through gates 35A, 35B have ball passage holes (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game balls winning through the through gates 35A, 35B flow downward directly below. As a result, all gaming balls that have won the through gate 35A in the left side area PE2 are introduced into the special role item 33 through the ball passage opening 33a. Further, the gaming ball having won the through gate 35B in the right side area PE3 wins the operation opening 34 in accordance with the subsequent ball operation and the state of the operation opening 34 (the opening and closing state of the item). The through gates 35A and 35B are provided with detection sensors 35c, respectively, and the game sensors that have won the through gates 35A and 35B are detected by the detection sensors 35c.

  The commercial item 34a of the operation port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state based on winning on the through gates 35A, 35B. Specifically, the internal lottery is performed triggered by the winning of the through gates 35A and 35B, and the drawing result display portion 37 of the lottery result display portion 37 provided in the lower left corner which is a region where the game ball does not pass in the gaming region PE. Variation display of the pattern is performed on the figure display unit 39. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the support winning and the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed and the variable display is ended, the mode is shifted to the support execution mode. In the support execution mode, the commercial electric utility 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

  Although the common view display unit 39 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT Or it may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as a dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern that is variably displayed by the common view display unit 39, a configuration in which plural types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which plural types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which plural types of characters are variably displayed A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed may be considered.

  In the present embodiment, the number of reservations when the game ball wins the through gates 35A and 35B is zero. Therefore, the suspension display unit corresponding to these is not provided.

  However, for example, if it is possible to hold one or a plurality of prizes for winning on through gates 35A and 35B, and thus enable to hold one or a plurality of prizes, a position adjacent to common drawing display portion 39 It is desirable that a common drawing reservation display unit be provided. For example, the number of game balls winning through gates 35A and 35B may be held up to a maximum of four, and the number of held balls may be displayed by turning on the general drawing hold display unit.

  A jackpot lottery is performed with the winning of the operation opening 34 or the special winning opening 52 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly indicated through display effects in the special view display unit 38 of the lottery result display unit 37 and the symbol display device 42 of the variable display unit 36.

  In detail about the special view display unit 38, the special view display unit 38 is provided with a first special view display unit 38a and a second special view display unit 38b. In the first special view display unit 38a, the winning display of the special winning opening 52 is used as a trigger to perform a big hit lottery, whereby variation display or predetermined display of a pattern is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Further, in the second special view display unit 38b, a big hit lottery is performed with the winning of the operation opening 34 as a trigger, thereby performing variation display or predetermined display of the pattern. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

  Although the first special view display unit 38a and the second special view display unit 38b are configured by segment displays in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a design displayed on the first special view display unit 38a and the second special view display unit 38b, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a plurality of types of characters May be displayed, or a plurality of different colors may be displayed.

  In detail about the symbol display device 42, the symbol display device 42 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 42 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be

  In the symbol display device 42, when the variable display or predetermined display of the symbol is performed on the first special view display unit 38a based on the winning on the special winning opening 52, the variable display or predetermined display of the symbol is lined accordingly When the variable display or predetermined display of the pattern is performed on the second special figure display unit 38b based on the winning on the operation opening 34, the variable display or predetermined display of the symbol is performed accordingly. In addition, when the variable display or predetermined display of the symbol is performed in the common view display unit 39 based on the winning on the through gates 35A and 35B, the variable display or predetermined display of the symbol is performed by the symbol display device 42 accordingly. To be done.

  The display content when the variable display of the symbol is performed by the symbol display device 42 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a view showing a display screen 42 a of the symbol display device 42.

  The design, which is a type of design, is composed of nine types of main designs to which numerals "1" to "9" are respectively attached, and a sub-pattern consisting of shell-shaped designs. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers of "1" to "9" to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of upper, middle and lower stages are set as a plurality of display areas. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols and the sub symbols are arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower figure pattern row Z3, nine types of main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of the numbers, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

  That is, the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are formed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1" The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged in each, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, ten main symbols are arranged and are configured by twenty symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (b), on the display screen 42a, three symbols are stop-displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine 3 × 3 symbols are stop-displayed. It is supposed to be. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, five effective lines, ie, the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the right downward line L4, and the right upward line L5 are set on the display screen 42a. .

  When variation display of symbols is performed on the display screen 42a based on winning on the through gates 35A, 35B, the operation opening 34 or the special winning opening 52, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have a predetermined direction with periodicity. The variable display is started to scroll to. Then, it is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 and finally the predetermined symbol is displayed in a stationary display in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 . In addition, when the fluctuation display of the symbol ends, when it corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode described later, or when corresponding to the transition to the support execution mode described later, on any of the effective lines A combination of the same symbols is formed.

  In addition, based on winning on any of through gates 35A and 35B, operation opening 34 and special winning opening 52, display is made on any of the special view display portions 38a and 38b, the common view display portion 39 and the symbol display device 42. One of the game times corresponds to the start of the game, the display of a predetermined result and the end of the process. In addition, the aspect of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol display device 42 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern variably displayed on the symbol display device 42 is not limited to the above-described symbol. For example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  In the present embodiment, the number of holdings when the gaming ball has won the operation opening 34 or the special winning opening 52 is one. However, no suspension display unit corresponding to these is provided. This is a device for making it difficult to understand which game round is based on winning to any of the game rounds performed based on the winnings on the through gates 35A, 35B, the operation opening 34 or the special winning opening 52.

  However, for example, a plurality of reservations may be made possible for winning on the operation opening 34 and the special winning opening 52, and in the case where it is thus possible to make a plurality of reservations, respective positions adjacent to the special view display portion 38 It is good for a special figure reservation display part to be provided. For example, it is preferable that the number of game balls winning in the operation opening 34 and the special winning opening 52 is held up to four at the maximum, and the number of holdings is displayed by lighting of each special view holding display unit.

  When a win is made in the big hit lottery based on the winning on the operation port 34 and the special winning port 52, the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode in which the winning on the special power winning device 32 is possible. Here, when the gaming ball passes through the ball passing opening 33a and the gaming ball is introduced to the special role product 33, every time the ball passes through the ball passing opening 33a, all the gaming balls win the special winning opening 52 Not only (ie, a big hit lottery is not executed every time), a game ball is won in the special winning opening 52 at a frequency of once per predetermined number of ball passing, and a big hit lottery is executed along with the winning .

  The special power winning device 32 is provided below the operation opening 34 in the right side area PE3. That is, when the firing operation device 28 is operated such that the game ball flows down the left area PE2, the special power winning device 32 can not win a prize, and the shooting operation device moves the game ball down the right area PE3. If 28 is operated, winning is possible.

  The special role product 33 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is an explanatory view for explaining the configuration of the special product 33. As shown in FIG. 6 (b) to 6 (e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the operation of the special character 33. FIG. 6B to 6E show a simplified configuration of the special character 33 in order to make it easy to explain the operation of the special character 33.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, in the special character 33, the passage case 33b is formed with a ball passage opening 33a of a size that allows the game ball to pass, and the game ball having passed the ball passage opening 33a. A game ball passage area R where the flow is made is formed. In the game ball passage area R, an internal passage 51 is formed by the pair of enclosure walls 33c (upper and lower enclosure walls 33c) of the passage case 33b and the projections 33d provided therebetween. The internal passage 51 is a passage for guiding the gaming ball having passed through the ball passage opening 33a to either the special winning opening 52 or the general winning opening 53, and the special winning opening 52 and the general winning arrangement from the ball passage opening 33a. It is formed over the mouth 53.

  When the gaming ball has won the special winning opening 52, a big hit lottery is performed, and when the gaming ball has won the general winning opening 53, the big hit lottery is not performed. In addition, a winning ball is performed when a game ball is won in either of the special winning opening 52 and the general winning opening 53, and in the present embodiment, three are provided. The special winning opening 52 is provided with a detection sensor 52 a for the special winning opening, and the general winning opening 53 is provided with a detection sensor 53 a for the general winning opening. Both of the detection sensors 52a and 53a detect which winning opening the game ball has won.

  The special winnings 33 are shifted to a state in which the special winning opening 52 is made to win a game ball as the predetermined number of gaming balls pass through the ball passage opening 33a. Specifically, the special product 33 is provided with a plurality of distribution plates 54 from the upstream side to the downstream side in the internal passage 51, and each of the distribution plates 54 has passed through the ball passage opening 33a. Based on the arrival of the game ball, the distribution destination of the game ball in the game ball passage area R is changed. That is, each distribution plate 54 is rotatably supported in both forward and reverse directions by a pivot shaft 55 provided at a substantially central portion in the vertical direction, and pivots about the pivot shaft 55. It can be said that each sorting plate 54 is a swinging body that swings when the game ball hits. In this case, each time the game ball flows down from the upstream side in the inner passage 51, each sorting plate 54 can win the game ball in the special winning opening 52 on the first passage 51a side (lower right direction in the figure). And the second passage 51b (in the lower left direction in the drawing) which can not be won in the special winning opening 52, respectively. In the present embodiment, eight distribution plates 54 are provided.

  The eight sorting plates 54 are arranged such that when the gaming ball is distributed to the first passage 51 a side by the sorting plate 54 of the former stage, the gaming ball reaches the sorting board 54 of the latter stage. When the number of passing game balls in the ball passage opening 33a reaches a predetermined number, all of the distribution destinations of the game balls on the eight sorting plates 54 are on the first passage 51a side, and the game balls are the special winning opening 52 It is supposed to move to the state of winning a prize.

  In each of the distribution plates 54, the lower portion of the upper and lower portions sandwiching the pivot shaft 55 is a thick tapered portion 56, and the width of the internal passage 51 is increased by the tapered portion 56. It is narrowed. In this case, when the gaming ball passes through the internal passage 51, the gaming ball comes in contact with the tapered portion 56 of the distribution plate 54, thereby making it possible to rotate the distribution plate 54. The selector board 54 rotated by the contact with the game balls guides the game balls passing next in a direction different from that of the game balls which have just passed. Specifically, if the distribution board 54 has the distribution destination of the game balls in the first passage 51a, it switches the distribution destination to the second passage 51b with the arrival of the next game ball, conversely, If the distribution destination of the game balls is in the second passage 51b, the distribution destination is switched to the first passage 51a with the arrival of the next game ball.

  A magnet 57 is provided on the upper side of the distribution plate 54 with the pivot shaft 55 interposed therebetween. Further, a magnet 58 on the passage side is provided on the back side surface of the special character 33 at a position which is a pivoting track of the magnet 57 on the distribution plate 54 side and above the pivot shaft 55. The two magnets 57 and 58 are provided so as to have repelling polarities. The repulsive force by the magnets 57 and 58 causes the magnet 57 on the distribution plate 54 side to be disposed either on the right side or the left side relative to the magnet 58 on the passage side in the natural state, and the gaming ball is placed in the first passage 51a and the first It is distributed to one of the two passages 51b.

  The magnets 57, 58 are position holding means for holding the distribution plate 54 at either a predetermined position downward to the right or a predetermined position downward to the left when the distribution plate 54 is rotated. Function. When the game ball hits the tapered portion 56 of the distribution plate 54, the magnet 57 on the distribution plate 54 side passes the front of the magnet 58 on the passage side and moves to the opposite side in the left-right direction. Here, the rotation shaft 55 of the distribution plate 54 extends in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 and is connected to a rotation restriction portion (not shown) at a position behind the internal passage 51. The rotation range of the distribution plate 54 is restricted by the rotation restriction portion, so that the distribution plate 54 is prevented from rotating more than necessary.

  The eight sorting plates 54 are provided continuously from the ball passage opening 33a to the respective winning openings 52 and 53, and the combination of the eight sorting plates 54, that is, the combination of the sorting destinations is 256 (2 = 8th street). Each time the game ball flows down the internal passage 51, the state of the eight distribution boards 54 changes, and the combination states of 256 ways are switched in order. In the internal passage 51, the flow-down path is different for each of 256 combinations of the sorting plates 54, and the game ball is guided from the ball passage opening 33a to the special winning opening 52 by one combination of them. Specifically, when all the sorting plates 54 distribute the gaming balls to the first passage 51a side (lower right direction), the gaming balls flowing down the internal passage 51 win the special winning opening 52 Do. The game balls passing through the other routes all win to the general winning opening 53.

  As described above, the provision of each distribution plate 54 enables the pachinko machine 10 to have a ceiling function. Here, the ceiling function is a function of giving a privilege to the player by performing a predetermined game a predetermined number of times, and the number of predetermined games to be executed until the privilege is given is called a ceiling. In the present embodiment, if the ball passing opening 33a can be generated 256 times, the ceiling can be reached and the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be shifted to the open / close execution mode with almost 100% probability.

  In the internal passage 51, the game balls distributed to the second passage 51b side (lower left direction) by the respective distribution plates 54 reach the general winning opening 53 without passing through any of the distribution plates 54 thereafter. It becomes. At this time, the player gets a winning ball earlier than the case of reaching the special winning opening 52 by the amount not passing through the downstream side sorting plate 54. Here, when there is a time difference (time lag) between the case where the special winning opening 52 has a game ball and the case where the general winning opening 53 has a game ball, a time lag is generated. By measuring the time until, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not there is a winning on the special winning opening 52. In order to make this prediction difficult, on the side of the second passage 51b, there is provided a ball contact portion 51c on which a game ball flowing down from the upstream side is hit. When the game ball collides with the ball contact portion 51c, the downward guidance of the game ball temporarily becomes gentle. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a time lag between the ball passing at the ball passage opening 33a and the winning ball when not passing through any of the distribution plates 54.

  Next, the game ball distribution operation in the special role product 33 will be described more specifically with reference to FIGS. 6 (b) to 6 (e). Here, in order to facilitate understanding, a configuration in which only two distribution plates 54 are used will be described. Thus, in the configuration provided with the two distribution plates 54, there are four combinations (as a square of 2) as the state of each distribution plate 54, and every four gaming balls passed through the ball passage opening 33a. It will be guided to the special winning opening 52.

  In FIG. 6B, in the initial state, each of the distribution boards 54 is in a state where the gaming balls are distributed to the lower left (the second passage 51b side). In this state, when the first game ball passes through the ball passage port 33a, the game ball is distributed to the lower left (the second passage 51b side) by the upper side sorting plate 54 and wins the general winning hole 53. . By the passage of the first game ball, the distribution destination of the sorting board 54 on the upper stage side is switched, and the special combination product 33 is in the state of FIG. 6 (c).

  Next, when the second game ball passes through the ball passage opening 33a, the game ball is distributed to the lower right (the first passage 51a side) by the upper side distribution board 54, and the lower side distribution It is distributed to the lower left (the second passage 51 b side) by the plate 54 and wins the general winning opening 53. By the passage of the second game ball, the distribution destinations of the respective distribution boards 54 on both the upper and lower stages are switched, and the special role product 33 is in the state of FIG. 6 (d).

  Next, when the third game ball passes through the ball passage port 33a, the game ball is distributed to the lower left (the second passage 51b side) by the upper side sorting plate 54 and wins the general winning hole 53. . By the passage of the third game ball, the distribution destination of the sorting plate 54 on the upper stage side is switched, and the special combination product 33 is in the state of FIG. 6 (e).

  Next, when the fourth game ball passes through the ball passage opening 33a, the game ball is distributed to the lower right (the first passage 51a side) by the upper side distribution board 54, and the lower side distribution It is distributed to the lower right (the first passage 51 a side) by the board 54, and the special winning opening 52 is won. By the passage of the fourth game ball, the distribution destinations of the respective distribution boards 54 on both the upper and lower stages are switched, and the special role product 33 returns to the state of FIG. 6 (e). Similarly, with the game balls passing through the ball passage openings 33a, each of the distribution boards 54 repeats the operation of FIG. 6 (b) → (c) → (d) → (e). Therefore, it becomes possible to win a game ball on the special winning opening 52 every predetermined number of passing balls.

  In the special role product 33 of the present embodiment, by providing the sorting plate 54 in the upper and lower eight stages, the special winning opening 52 is awarded whenever the game ball passes the ball passing opening 33a 256 times. , The number can be changed arbitrarily. For example, when only one sorting plate 54 is provided, a winning on the special winning opening 52 occurs each time the game ball passes the ball passage opening 33a twice. In addition, if the sorting plate 54 is provided in the upper and lower six stages, the special winning opening 52 is won every time the game ball passes the ball passage opening 33a 64 times, and the sorting plate 54 is provided in the upper and lower seven stages For example, every time the game ball passes the ball passage opening 33a 128 times, a winning on the special winning opening 52 occurs.

  Here, in order to realize the ceiling function in the pachinko machine 10, it is desirable that the winning probability of the jackpot lottery to be executed when the gaming ball has won in the special winning opening 52 is approximately 100%. As a result, when the game ball is repeatedly introduced to the special role product 33, a big hit will be executed for each execution of a predetermined number of times (256 times in the present embodiment) of game times.

  Next, the special power winning device 32 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the special power winning device 32 has a large winning opening 32a of a size through which the game ball can pass, and the gaming ball can not pass through the large winning opening 32a. It has an opening / closing member 32b on the special power side that switches to an open state in which the ball can pass. The special power side open / close member 32b is driven by a special power drive 32c through a link mechanism (not shown) to be in an open state. In addition, the special power winning device 32 has a winning passage portion formed at a position where the gaming ball that has won the special power winning device 32 via the special winning opening 32a must pass, and further, the position of the winning passage portion A detection sensor 32e for the special winning opening is provided in such a manner that a detection area is present in. The game ball that has won the special power winning device 32 is individually detected by the detection sensor 32e for the special winning opening.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 formed by attaching the gaming board 24 having the above configuration to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 that enables the player to view substantially the entire game area PE from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is formed to be colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this and may be formed to be colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin, and the game area PE may be formed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 If it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

  Around the window portion 61, light emitting means such as various light emitting portions are provided. A display light emitting unit 63 is provided on the right side of the window unit 61 as a part of various light emitting units. In addition, an error light emitting unit 64 is provided above the window unit 61. In addition, a pair of left and right speaker units 65 to which sound effects and the like according to the game state are output are provided.

  Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 66 and a lower bulging portion 67 bulging toward the front side are vertically juxtaposed. An upper plate 66a opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 66, and a lower plate 67a similarly opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 67. The upper tray 66a has a function for temporarily storing gaming balls paid out from a later described payout device and guiding the gaming balls to the gaming ball shooting mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 67a has a function of storing the game balls surplus in the upper tray 66a.

  Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24), a main control device 71 which controls the main control of the game is mounted. The main control unit 71 has a main control board housed in a board box.

  A back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 71. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and to the back pack 72, a dispensing mechanism portion 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached.

  The payout mechanism section 73 includes a tank 75 to which the gaming balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the gaming balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper tray 66a or the lower tray 67a through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. In addition, for example, a main pack power of, for example, 24 AC, is supplied to the dispensing mechanism portion 73, and a back pack substrate having a power switch for performing an ON operation and an OFF operation of the power is mounted.

  The control device assembly unit 74 generates and outputs a predetermined amount of power required by various control devices and the like as a payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and is accompanied by the operation of the discharge operation device 28 by the player. A power supply and launch control device 78 is provided to control the launch of the game balls. The payout control device 77 and the power supply and discharge control device 78 are disposed so as to be stacked back and forth so that the payout control device 77 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  In the back pack 72, an external terminal plate 79 is provided in addition to the dispensing mechanism portion 73 and the control device assembly unit 74. The external terminal plate 79 is installed at the base end side of the back pack unit 15 on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 and at an upper corner portion. The external terminal board 79 is a board for outputting a predetermined signal in order to cause the management computer of the gaming hall to recognize the state of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  The main control device 71 comprises a main control board 81 which controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board (power interruption monitoring board) 85 which monitors the power supply. The MPU 82 is mounted on the main control board 81. The MPU 82 incorporates a ROM 83 and a RAM 84.

  The ROM 83 is configured to use a memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage unit) such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory which does not require an external power supply for storage, as a read only memory. The ROM 83 stores various control programs to be executed by the MPU 82 and fixed value data.

  The RAM 84 is configured to use a memory, such as an SRAM or a DRAM, which requires an external power supply for storage and storage, for both reading and writing. While random access is possible, the same data capacity is compared. The time required for reading is earlier than that of the ROM 83. The RAM 84 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 83 is executed.

  In addition to the above elements, the MPU 82 or the main control board 81 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. The fact that the ROM 83 and the RAM 84 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 82 is not an essential configuration, and each may be configured as an individual chip. This is also true for other control devices.

  The MPU 82 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. To the input side of the MPU 82, a power failure monitoring board 85, a payout control device 77, various detection sensors 32e, 34c, 35c, 52a, 53a and the like are connected. A power supply and emission control device 78 is connected to the power failure monitoring substrate 85, and power is supplied to the MPU 82 via the power failure monitoring substrate 85. In addition, based on the detection results of the various detection sensors 32e, 34c, 35c, 52a, 53a, the MPU 82 performs a winning determination (ball entering determination) for each winning portion. Further, the MPU 82 executes a jackpot lottery based on the winning on the special winning opening 52 or the operation opening 34, and executes a support lottery based on the winning on the through gates 35A, 35B.

  The power failure monitoring board 85, the payout control device 77, and the sound light control device 300 are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. For example, a winning ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on the result of the winning determination on the winning portion. The sound and light control device 300 outputs various commands such as a fluctuation command, a type command, a final stop command, an opening command, and an ending command. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  Also, on the output side of the MPU 82, a drive unit 32c for special power to open and close the opening and closing member 32b of the special power winning device 32, and a drive unit 34b for general power to open and close the common electric utility 34a of the operation port 34 are connected. Further, the lottery result display unit 37 including the first special view display unit 38a, the second special view display unit 38b, and the common view display unit 39 is connected. The main control board 81 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 82 executes drive control of various driving units through the driver circuits.

  In addition, an external terminal board 79 is connected to the output side of the MPU 82. The external terminal board 79 is provided with a plurality of external terminals (output terminals). For example, eight external terminals are provided, and the types of information externally output to the management computer are different. The plurality of external terminals include a terminal for performing an external output of a switching execution signal indicating that the switching execution mode is in progress, and a terminal for performing an external output of a support execution signal indicating that the support execution mode is in progress. And a terminal for externally outputting a high frequency signal indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress. The MPU 82 sets information in accordance with the progress of the game to the external output buffer provided in the RAM 84. Then, in accordance with the information set in the external output buffer, the setting for signal output is performed on the external terminal board 79, and the management computer of the gaming hall is made to recognize the state of the pachinko machine 10. Each external terminal is configured using a photocoupler to enable the transmission of an electrical signal from the main control device 71 to the management computer while preventing the reverse flow.

  The power failure monitoring board 85 relays the main control board 81 and the power supply and emission control device 78, and monitors the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and emission control device 78. The payout control device 77 performs the payout control of the winning balls and the lending balls by the payout device 76 based on the winning ball command input from the main control device 71.

  The power supply and launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 81, the payout control device 77, etc. generate necessary operation power for each, and the generated operation power is supplied through a predetermined power path. Do. Incidentally, the power supply and discharge control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for powering off such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the powering unit for powering off mainly The RAM 84 of the control device 71 is supplied with storage power. Further, the power supply and launch control device 78 is responsible for the launch control of the gaming ball launch mechanism 27, and drives the game sphere launch mechanism 27 based on the specification of a predetermined launch operation to the launch operation device 28.

  The MPU 302 is mounted on the sound light control substrate 301 provided in the sound light control device 300. The MPU 302 is a ROM 303 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 302 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 303 is executed. A certain RAM 304 and an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, etc. are incorporated.

  The MPU 302 drives and controls the display light emitting unit 63, the error light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 provided in the front door frame 14 based on the command received from the main control device 71. In addition, these commands are transmitted to the display control apparatus 400 as they are or after analysis. Incidentally, the sound light control device 300 is electrically connected to the display control device 400 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  The display control device 400 is a display control board 401 on which an MPU 402, which is an element formed by compounding program ROM 403 and work RAM 404, a video display processor (VDP) 405, a character ROM 406, and a video RAM 407 are mounted. Is equipped.

  The MPU 402 analyzes various commands received from the main control apparatus 71 via the sound light control apparatus 300 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on various commands received to control the VDP 405 (specifically, internal commands to the VDP 405) To create the

  The program ROM 403 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 402 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background image. The work RAM 404 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 402 executes various programs.

  The VDP 405 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 42. Since the VDP 405 is formed into an IC chip, it is also referred to as a "drawing chip", and its substance is to be said to be a microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 405 adjusts timings of the MPU 402, the video RAM 407, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out image data to be stored in the video RAM 407 from the character ROM 406 at a predetermined timing and causes the symbol display device 42 to display it.

  The character ROM 406 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 42. The character ROM 406 holds bit map type image data of various display symbols, a color pallet table to be referred to when determining a color to be expressed in each dot of the bit map image, and the like. These image data, tables, etc. are stored in the character ROM 406.

  It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 406 and store image data and the like in each of the character ROMs 406 in a shared manner. It is also possible to store in the character ROM 406 the JPEG format image data for background image stored in the program ROM 403.

  The video RAM 407 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 42, and the display content of the symbol display device 42 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 407.

<Electric configuration for performing various lottery with MPU 82>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 82 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 82 uses a variety of counter information to make a big hit lottery, an open lottery for the common electric utility product 34a, display settings of the first special view display unit 38a and the second special view display unit 38b, and symbol display of the symbol display device 42. The setting, the setting of the display of the common drawing display unit 39, and the like are performed. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for lottery of jackpot occurrence, a support type counter C2 used for lottery of the type of support mode set after the opening / closing execution mode, and winnings to the operation opening 34 or the special winning opening 52 The first reach random number counter C3 used for the reach occurrence lottery when the symbol display device 42 deviates out based on the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1, and each special view display unit 38a, 38b and the first variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation display time (operation continuation time or special figure variation time) in the symbol display device 42, and the support lottery for whether or not to set the common control utility 34a in the open state And the symbol display device 42 is detached and fluctuated based on winning of the through gate 35A, 35B and the common charge random number counter C4 used for Using the second reach random number counter C5 used for the reach occurrence lottery in the second case and the second variation type counter CS2 for determining the variation display time (the operation continuation time or the There is. The counters C1 to C5, CINI and CS1 to CS2 are provided in the lottery counter area 101 of the RAM 84.

  Each of the counters C1 to C5, CINI, and CS1 to CS2 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the updating is performed, and reaches a maximum value and returns to 0. Each counter is updated at short intervals.

  Each numerical value information of the big hit random number counter C1, the support type counter C2 and the first reach random number counter C3 is provided as a received information storage means for the big hit lottery when a winning in the operation opening 34 or the special winning opening 52 occurs. It is stored in the special map reservation area 102. The special drawing reservation area 102 includes a first special drawing reservation area 103, a second special drawing reservation area 104, and a special drawing execution area 105.

  In the first special drawing reservation area 103 and the second special drawing reservation area 104, one area capable of being held and stored is provided. And, it is a situation where neither the effect for the game circulation nor the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the winning a prize on the special winning opening 52 occurs in a situation where the holding information is not acquired in the first special drawing holding area 103 By doing this, each numerical information of the big hit random number counter C1, the support type counter C2 and the first reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first special view reserve area 103 as reserve information on the special view side, and the second special view reserve area 104 In the situation where the hold information has not been acquired, the numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the support type counter C2 and the first reach random number counter C3 is held as the hold information of the special view side by the winning of the operation opening 34 , And stored in the second special view reservation area 104.

  In the special drawing execution area 105, when variable display is started in any of the special drawing display portions 38a and 38b, the suspension information of the target to be subjected to the special drawing acceptance / disapproval determination, the distribution determination, etc. is stored. It is an area. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special view display unit 38 a is started, the hold information stored in the first special view hold area 103 is moved to the special view execution area 105. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special view display unit 38b is started, the hold information stored in the second special view reserve area 104 is moved to the special view execution area 105.

  On the other hand, the common drawing reserve area 106 provided as the acquired information storage means for support lottery does not have an area that can be held and stored, and the variable drawing display unit 39 starts variable display. Only the execution area 107 for general drawing is provided as an area in which the holding information of the target for which the propriety judgment for support is to be performed is stored. Therefore, the various numerical value information of the common charge random number counter C4, the second reach random number counter C5 and the second variation type counter CS2 is directly applied to the execution area 107 for common drawing when the winnings on the through gates 35A and 35B occur. It is stored, and support judgment is started. That is, various numerical information for the support lottery is stored only when the winnings on the through gates 35A and 35B occur in the situation where the suspension information is not stored in the execution area 107 for common drawing, and the execution area for common drawing is stored. Even if a prize is awarded to the through gates 35A and 35B in the situation where the hold information is stored in 107, various numerical information for the support lottery is not held.

  The respective counters will be described in detail.

  First, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described.

  For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 599, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the big hit random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the large hitting random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the special image holding area 102 at the timing when the gaming ball has won the operation opening 34 or the special winning opening 52 as described above.

  The value of the random number to be the jackpot win is stored as a jackpot table for the jackpot in the hit / fail table storage area as the hit / fail information group storage means in the ROM 83. In the jackpot success / failure table, a common special drawing hit / fail table used for judging whether the hold information acquired based on the winning of the operation opening 34 or the special winning opening 52 is determined.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the jackpot result and the outlier result are set as the result of the judgment by referring to the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot result is a result of shifting the gaming state to the open / close execution mode in which the special power prize device 32 is opened / closed.

  The open / close execution mode is executed with an upper limit of a predetermined number of round games. With round game, one of the conditions that a predetermined special power open duration time elapses, and that a predetermined number of special power upper limit number of game balls win a prize winning opening 32a is satisfied. It is a game that continues until it In the pachinko machine 10, only the upper limit number of round games is set to 2 rounds as the open / close execution mode, but multiple open / close execution modes are set so that the upper limit number of round games is different It may be done.

  The open continuation time of each round game is the same, and the open continuation time is 29.5 sec, which is the upper limit winning correspondence time which is not less than the product of the firing cycle of the gaming balls and the upper limit number of winning. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch operation device 28 is continuously operated by the player, the game ball is fired so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PE in 0.6 sec. The mechanism 27 is driven and controlled. In addition, the upper limit number of round game winning is set to ten. Then, in each round game, the open continuation time greater than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of corresponding round games is set, and the firing operation is performed in a manner to aim for winning the special power prize device 32 When is continued, the winning of the upper limit number to the special winning opening 32a occurs in each round game.

  In addition, if winning of the upper limit number of round games is possible, the open continuation time of each round game is optional. In addition, the opening continuation time may be different between the round games, and in this case, the opening continuation time may be largely different between the round games, and they are set substantially the same so as to be similar in appearance. It is also good.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, the jackpot result and the outlier result are set in the hit / not table for the special drawing as the result of the pass / fail. The number of random numbers to be the jackpot result is set to 599, and the probability of the jackpot result is 599/600 by referring to the special drawing use / non-permission table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the probability may be set lower than the above.

  Next, the support type counter C2 will be described.

  The support type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 27 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The support type counter C2 is periodically updated, and, as described above, is stored in the special view holding area 102 at the timing when the gaming ball has won the operation opening 34 or the special winning opening 52.

  The support type counter C2 is used to determine the support mode of the power control unit 34a of the operation port 34 after the end of the open / close execution mode. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, as a support mode, when compared in the situation where the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area PE, the commercial power item 34a is opened per unit time. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are set such that the frequency of state becoming relatively high and low.

  First, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 will be briefly described.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the gaming ball having passed the through gate 35A always enters the special role item 33. The gaming ball that has entered the 256th game wins the special winning opening 52. Based on the winning on the special winning opening 52, the above-mentioned jackpot random number counter C1 is obtained, and almost 100% thereof is the jackpot result. When the jackpot results, the special power prize device 32 shifts to the open / close execution mode where the open state, and the player can obtain a prize ball by winning the gaming ball to the special prize port 32a of the special power prize device 32 . Also, the opening / closing execution mode can be shifted by a winning lottery based on the winning of the operation port 34. As already described, winning of the operation port 34 is permitted when the commercial item 34a is in the open state.

  The random number counter C4 is used in the lottery for determining whether or not the general electric utility 34a is to be opened. And, in the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode described above, the probability of becoming a support winning in the support lottery using the common charge random number counter C4 (to set the common use product 34a in the open state) differs, and the low frequency support In the mode, the winning probability is lower than in the high frequency support mode. In the support winning case, in any of the support modes, an opening of 5 seconds longer than the firing cycle of the game balls is performed once. That is, winning in the operation port 34 is permitted by becoming support winning in any of the support modes, and it is possible to shift to the open / close execution mode.

  On the other hand, in the low frequency support mode, the winning probability of the support lottery is set to be lower than that in the high frequency support mode. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, it is difficult to win the operation port 34 compared to the high frequency support mode. Further, if one of the through gates 35A is made to win a prize rather than the through gate 35B, a prize ball (three in the present embodiment) is paid out based on the winnings on the special prize port 52 or the general prize port 53 thereafter. Since the special winning opening 52 is won at the 256th time due to the switching of the distribution board 54 in the bonus item 33, there is an advantage that the way of winning through the through gate 35A approaches the ceiling.

  Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the player operates the firing operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the left area PE2 to win the through gate 35A in the low frequency support mode, or the special winning is achieved or the special winning When transitioning to the open / close execution mode based on the winning on the opening 52, the operating mode of the firing operation device 28 is switched so that the gaming ball flows down the right area PE3 to win the opening 34 or the large winning opening 32a. .

  In the high frequency support mode, although the prize balls are not paid out by the winning on the through gate 35B, the support is won more frequently than in the low frequency support mode, and the prize is awarded based on the winning on the operation opening 34. You can get a ball. Then, since the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode by the winning of the operation port 34, a winning ball can be obtained also by the winning of the large winning port 32a. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player basically operates the firing operation device 28 so that the gaming ball flows down the right area PE3 in order to win the through gate 35B.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the ceiling function is realized using the special character 33, and a novel game is realized using the prize on the side of the drawing, the prize on the special figure side, and the height of the support mode. ing.

  As described above, it is possible to receive a support lottery by winning through gate 35B as well, and even if it is in the low frequency support mode by becoming a support winning, it is opened longer than the firing cycle of gaming balls in the commercial electric utility 34a. It is also conceivable that the player operates the launch operating device 28 to make the through gate 35B win even in the low frequency support mode, since the player is allowed to win the prize in the operation port 34. In this case, although winning in special winning opening 52 can not occur, firing is more likely to occur in through gate 35A and through gate 35B, that is, depending on nail 24b and gauge configuration, it is fired to achieve through gate 35B. The advantage of operating the operating device 28 also arises.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 10, the arrangement of the nails 24b is such that the through gate 35B is more likely to win than the through gate 35A from the viewpoint of suitable progress of the game in the high frequency support mode and adjustment of the ball expansion rate. And gauge configurations are designed. That is, in the high frequency support mode, it is necessary to make the through gate 35B easy to win in order to be able to easily win the operation opening 34, and making it easy to win the through gate 35A is also easy to win special winnings. As a result of the winning of the mouth 52, there is a concern about the rising rate of the ball. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 10, even if aiming at either the through gate 35A, 35B on either the left or right side to operate the firing operation device 28, a merit is produced and both game characteristics can be realized, and any through gate 35A, 35B. A new game is also added, which allows the player to make a choice to operate the launch operation device 28 aiming at the

  However, in the present embodiment, when the through gate 35A is made to win, the through gate 35A is made to win from the relationship between the winning ball based on the winning in the special winning opening 52 or the general winning opening 53 and the number of ceilings. The merit is set to be larger than the merit for winning through gate 35B, and basically, the player operates launch operation device 28 to win through gate 35A in the low frequency support mode as described above. Manipulate.

  The distribution result for the support type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 83. As the distribution table, it is acquired based on the distribution table for the first special drawing used for the distribution determination of the suspension information acquired based on the winning of the special winning opening 52 and the winning of the operating opening 34 A second special-purpose distribution table is set which is used when determining distribution of the hold information. And in these distribution tables, a low frequency result and a high frequency result are set as the distribution results.

  If the distribution result is a low frequency result, the support mode after the corresponding open / close execution mode ends is set to the low frequency support mode regardless of the type of the previous support mode. This low frequency support mode is then continued until the jackpot result is set and the high frequency support mode is set.

  If the distribution result is a high-frequency result, the support mode after the corresponding open / close execution mode is ended is set to the high-frequency support mode regardless of the type of the previous support mode. The high-frequency support mode is a high-frequency support mode with a limited number of transitions to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference frequency (specifically, 100 times) after the transition.

  As the first special view distribution table, a common distribution table is set regardless of the height of the support mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9B, the high frequency result is selected regardless of the value of the support type counter C2. Therefore, when shifting to the open / close execution mode triggered by the hold information acquired based on the winning of the special winning opening 52, the high frequency support mode is always set thereafter.

  In the second special view distribution table, different distribution tables are set according to the level of the support mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9C, in the low frequency support mode distribution table, the high frequency results are selected regardless of the value of the support type counter C2, as shown in FIG. 9C. It has become so. Therefore, when transitioning to the open / close execution mode triggered by the hold information acquired based on the winning of the operation port 34 in the low frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is always set thereafter. On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second special view referred to in the high frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 9D, among the values of the support type counter C2 of "0 to 27", "0" is It corresponds to the low frequency result, and "1 to 27" corresponds to the high frequency result. Therefore, when switching to the open / close execution mode triggered by the hold information acquired based on the winning in the operation port 34 in the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is higher than the probability that the low frequency support mode is set thereafter. The probability of being set is higher.

  That is, in the low frequency support mode, when the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode based on the winning of either of the special winning opening 52 and the operation port 34, the high frequency support mode is always shifted thereafter. Then, in the high frequency support mode, after switching to the open / close execution mode shifted based on the winning on the operation port 34, the low frequency support mode is entered with a probability of 1/28.

  Next, the first reach random number counter C3 and the second reach random number counter C5 will be described.

  For example, the first reach random number counter C3 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The first reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and, as described above, is stored in the special image holding area 102 at the timing when the gaming ball has won the operation opening 34 or the special winning opening 52.

  In addition, the second reach random number counter C5 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within a range of 0 to 283, for example, and to return to zero after reaching the maximum value. The second reach random number counter C5 is periodically updated, and is stored in the execution area 107 for general drawing on condition that no suspension information is stored at the timing when the gaming ball wins the through gates 35A and 35B.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the variable display of the common view display unit 39 is started and the variable display of the symbol display device 42 is started, triggered by the game ball winning on the through gates 35A, 35B. Ru. Further, in response to the winning of the operation opening 34 or the special winning opening 52, the variable display of the special view display portions 38a and 38b is started and the variable display of the symbol display device 42 is started. That is, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of winnings serving as a trigger for starting variable display in the symbol display device 42.

  In the following description, the variable display of the symbol display device 42 based on winning on the through gates 35A and 35B, and the variable display of the symbol display device 42 based on winning on the operation opening 34 or the special winning opening 52. For distinction, the variation display of the symbol display device 42 based on the winning on the through gates 35A, 35B is also referred to as a common drawing sub variation, and the special drawing sub of the symbol display 42 based on winning on the operation opening 34 or the special winning opening 52 It is also called fluctuation. Further, in order to distinguish the variable display of the common drawing display unit 39 based on winning on the through gates 35A and 35B from the common drawing sub-variation described above, the variable display of the common drawing display unit 39 is also referred to as common drawing main fluctuation. Furthermore, in order to distinguish the variable display of the special view display portions 38a and 38b based on the winning on the operation opening 34 or the special winning opening 52 with the above special view sub-change, the special display of the special view display portions 38a and 38b is It is also called main fluctuation.

  Here, the reach display is provided with the symbol display device 42 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (pattern), and the game display changes when the transition to the open / close execution mode or the support execution mode occurs. In the gaming machine in which the stop display result after display is the special display result, before the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (pattern) in the symbol display device 42 is started and before the stop display result is derived and displayed, The display state to make the player think that the variable display state is likely to be the special display result.

  In reach display, by stopping and displaying the symbols for a part of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42, a reach symbol having a possibility that the combination of the big hit symbols is established The display state which displays the combination of and performs the fluctuation display of a symbol in the remaining symbol row in that state is included. Also, while displaying combinations of reach symbols as described above, while performing variable display of symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing reach effects by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image, or Also, it is possible to perform reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image over substantially the entire display screen after reducing or non-displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  In the special figure sub change in the low frequency support mode, reach display is executed regardless of the value of the first reach random number counter C3 in the game time to shift to the open / close execution mode. In addition, in the game times which are not shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the first reach random number counter C3 corresponds to the occurrence of reach display with reference to the first reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 83. To be executed.

  Furthermore, in the game view transitioning to the support execution mode in the common drawing sub fluctuation in the low frequency support mode, reach display is executed regardless of the value of the second reach random number counter C5. In addition, in the game times not transitioning to the support execution mode, the second reach random number counter C5 corresponds to the occurrence of reach display with reference to the second reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 83. To be executed.

  Here, in the low frequency support mode, the same variation display modes of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the special figure sub variation and the common figure sub variation are all set to the same one. And although the reach display in the above-mentioned special figure sub fluctuation and the reach display in the common drawing sub fluctuation are the contents of the effect of a plurality of reach displays being set, respectively, the kind becomes the same contents in all. In addition, when it moves to opening / closing execution mode in special figure sub fluctuation and when it shifts to support execution mode in common drawing sub fluctuation, the combination of the same symbol is formed on the effective line, and the game round ends Do. Therefore, the player can not specify which of the special figure sub-variation and the common figure sub-variation is being executed from the contents of the effect of the symbol display device 42. In addition, even if the symbol is finally stopped, the combination of the above symbols is triggered by any fluctuation of the general drawing side and the special drawing side until either the special electric symbol winning device 32 or the general electric utility product 34a is in the open state. It can not be identified if it was formed.

  That is, in the present embodiment, while raising the willingness of the player to continue the game by utilizing the ceiling function of the special character 33, the effect by the special display side in the effect by the symbol display device 42 is the same as the effect by the general drawing side. By setting it as a thing, it can be seen as if the ceiling function is realized based on the winning of the through gate 35A, and it is possible to raise the attention to the winning of the through gate 35A.

  In the high frequency support mode, the reach display does not occur regardless of the numerical information of the reach random number counters C3 and C5 and the game result. Specifically, as an effect of each game turn of the symbol display device 42 in the high frequency support mode, the fluctuation display of each game turn of the common drawing sub fluctuation and the special drawing sub fluctuation is not executed, and the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is performed Only when the game is played, a jackpot notification of that effect (for example, a character display of a jackpot and effects by sound effects etc.) are performed. This is a device for suppressing sagging by performing off-stage production during a series.

  Next, the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 will be described.

  The first variation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The first variation type counter CS1 is a variation display time (display continuation period) in the special view display unit 38a, 38b, that is, a variation display time of the special view main variation, and a variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 42, that is, the special view It is used in determining the fluctuation display time of the sub fluctuation in the MPU 82. The first variation type counter CS1 is acquired at the time of the effect pattern determination at the start of the special view main variation and the start of the special view sub variation.

  The second variation type counter CS2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The second variation type counter CS2 is a variation display time (display continuation period) in the common view display unit 39, that is, a variation display time of the common view main variation, and a variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 42, that is, the common view sub variation Is used in determining the fluctuation display time of The second variation type counter CS2 is different from the first variation type counter CS1 and is stored in the execution area 107 for general drawing on condition that no hold information is stored at the timing when the winnings on the through gates 35A and 35B occur. Stored.

  When determining these fluctuation display times, the fluctuation display time table (variation display time information group) stored in advance in the fluctuation display time table storage area (variation display time information storage unit) of the ROM 83 is referred to.

  The variable display time table for the special figure main change and the special figure sub change is executed when the game circulation effect is executed triggered by the hold information concerning the operation port 34 or the hold information concerning the special winning hole 52 in the low frequency support mode In the high-frequency support mode, it is stored separately from the case where the game round effect is executed triggered by the hold information related to the operation opening 34 or the hold information related to the special winning opening 52 in the high frequency support mode. The variable display time in the high frequency support mode is set shorter than the variable display time in the low frequency support mode.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10A, the fluctuation display time in the low frequency support mode is set to 20 seconds, and after the fluctuation display, the result of the jackpot lottery is maintained for 0.6 seconds. Ru. Further, as shown in FIG. 10B, the fluctuation display time in the high frequency support mode is set to 0.64 sec, and after the fluctuation display, the result of the jackpot lottery is maintained for 0.6 sec.

  That is, information of the fluctuation display time in the special figure main fluctuation and the special drawing sub fluctuation read out in the high frequency support mode, and the special drawing main fluctuation read out in the low frequency support mode and the fluctuation display time in the special drawing sub fluctuation Although their lengths are different, they are the same regardless of the value of the first variation type counter CS1. As a result, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity of the information of the fluctuation display time stored in advance. Further, in the high frequency support mode, a game is performed aiming for winning in the operation opening 34, and winning in the special winning opening 52 is generated unintentionally, so the presentation for the game cycle may be shortened. preferable.

  On the other hand, the fluctuation display time table in the common drawing main fluctuation and the common drawing sub fluctuation is similar to the fluctuation display time table in the special drawing main fluctuation and the special drawing sub fluctuation, winnings to the through gates 35A, 35B in the low frequency support mode It is stored separately from the case where the effect for the game run is executed as a trigger and the case where the effect for the game run is executed with the winning on the through gates 35A, 35B in the high frequency support mode. The variable display time in the high frequency support mode is set shorter than the variable display time in the low frequency support mode. However, unlike the fluctuation display time table in the special drawing main fluctuation and the special drawing sub fluctuation, the fluctuation display time table in the low frequency support mode in the fluctuation display time table in the common drawing main fluctuation and the common drawing sub fluctuation A table and a variable display time table for reach occurrence are set.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10C, a plurality of variable display time tables for non-reach occurrence in the low frequency support mode are set in accordance with the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, In the embodiment, three types of 12.0 seconds, 15.0 seconds, and 18.0 seconds are set, and after the variable display, the result of the support lottery is maintained for 0.6 seconds. Further, in the fluctuation display time table for reach occurrence in the low frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 10 (d), the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is longer so as to be longer than the fluctuation display time at the time of reach nonoccurrence. In the present embodiment, three types of 24 sec, 36 sec, and 42 sec are set, and after the variable display, the result of the support lottery is maintained for 0.6 sec. On the other hand, the fluctuation display time in the high frequency support mode is set to the same 2.74 sec as shown in FIG. 10 (e), and the result of the support lottery is 0.6 sec after the fluctuation display. It is maintained over.

  That is, the information on the fluctuation display time in the common drawing main fluctuation and the common drawing sub fluctuation which is read out in the high frequency support mode is the same regardless of the winning on any of the through gates 35A, 35B. As a result, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity of the information of the fluctuation display time stored in advance. In addition, the information on the fluctuation display time in the common drawing main fluctuation and the common drawing sub fluctuation read out in the low frequency support mode differs depending on the presence / absence of reach and the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, and the common drawing main fluctuation and common fluctuation It is possible to make various effects for game use in the figure-sub variation. Further, the variable display time set in the low frequency support mode is a time (period of time required for the game ball to pass to the special winning opening 52 or the general winning opening 53 after passing the through gate 35A (period) (E.g., 10 sec). This action will be described in detail later.

  In addition, about the fluctuation display time by the side of a special figure, it may be set so that the fluctuation display time may differ by the time of reach | attainment generation | occurrence | production, and the time of reach non-occurrence | production similarly to the fluctuation | variation display time by the side of a general drawing.

  Next, the common charge random number counter C4 will be described.

  For example, the common charge random number counter C4 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 719, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The routine charge random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and as described above, is stored in the execution area 107 of the common view reserve area 106 on the condition that no hold information is stored at the timing when the through gates 35A and 35B win. Ru. As described above, a support lottery is performed to determine whether the general-purpose electric utility 34a is controlled to the open state by using the value of the general-purpose random number counter C4.

  As already explained above, although the winning probability of the support lottery varies depending on the support mode, the opening mode of the commercial item 34a in the case of the support winning is the same.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11A, in the common drawing hit / not table referred to in the low frequency support mode, the support winning result and the out result are set as the hit / fall results. When the lottery result is the support winning result, the general public utility symbol 34a is opened once, and the open continuation time is set to 5 sec. Among the values "0 to 719", the value "0 to 5" of the common charge random number counter C4 corresponds to the support winning result, and "6 to 719" corresponds to the deviation result.

  That is, in the low-frequency support mode, the general-purpose utilities 34a are opened with a probability of 1/120 based on winning on the through gates 35A and 35B, for example, the player shoots the game ball by aiming at the through gate 35A. In the case where the lottery result with the winning on the through gate 35A results in the support winning result, it is possible to win a prize in the operation opening 34, so that the opening / closing execution mode is made regardless of the number of times of entering the ceiling. It is possible to make the transition.

  As shown in FIG. 11B, in the common drawing hit / not table referred to in the high frequency support mode, the support winning result and the out result are set as the winning result. When the lottery result is the support winning result, the general public utility symbol 34a is opened once, and the open continuation time is set to 5 sec. Among "0 to 719", "0 to 575" corresponds to the support winning result, and "576 to 719" corresponds to the out result of the common charge random number counter C4. That is, in the high-frequency support mode, the general-purpose utilities 34a are opened with a probability of 12/15 based on winning on the through gates 35A and 35B, and the operating port 34 is earlier than the low-frequency support mode. It is possible to win a prize.

  The case where the support mode is not the open / close execution mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode corresponds to the normal gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Further, instead of the configuration in which each lottery counter is provided in the RAM 84, the MPU 82 may be provided as a dedicated circuit so as not to contribute to the update of the random number.

<Various processing executed by MPU 82>
Next, each process performed in order to advance a game in MPU82 of the main control apparatus 71 is demonstrated. The processes of the MPU 82 can be roughly divided into a main process that is activated with power on and a timer interrupt process that is activated periodically (in this embodiment, in a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S101, power on wait processing is performed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits until 1 sec elapses after the main process is started, without progressing to the next process. In the following step S102, access to the RAM 84 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 82 is set.

  Thereafter, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply and emission control device 78 is manually operated, and in the subsequent step S105, "1" is set in the power failure flag of the RAM 84 or not. Determine if In step S106, a checksum calculation process is performed to calculate a checksum. In the subsequent step S107, it is determined whether the checksum matches the checksum stored at the time of power shutdown, that is, the validity of stored data. judge.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the start of business operation of the game hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. In addition, when the occurrence information of the power-off is not set, or when the abnormality of the data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process similarly shifts to the process of step S108. In step S108, the RAM 84 is cleared as initialization of the RAM 84. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch is not pressed, the process in step S108 is not performed under the condition that the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal. Go to In step S109, power on setting processing is performed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 84 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the sound light control device 300 to recognize the current gaming state. Do. Further, a payout initialization command indicating that the initialization of the RAM of the payout control device 77 should be performed is transmitted to the payout control device 77. Further, in order to permit the generation of timer interrupt processing, the interrupt permission is set.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of step S110 to step S113. That is, although the MPU 82 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. Although this remaining time fluctuates in accordance with the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of step S110 to step S113 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining process of the step S110 to the step S113 is a non-periodic process which is executed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S110, in order to inhibit the generation of the timer interrupt process, the interrupt disable setting is performed. In the following step S111, the random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and the variation counter updating process for updating the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 in step S112 Run. In these update processes, the present numerical value information is read out from the corresponding counter of the RAM 84, and the process of adding one to the read out numerical value information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S113, interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from the state where the generation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited to the state where it is permitted. If the process of step S113 is performed, it will return to step S110 and will repeat the process of step S110-step S113.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing the timer interrupt process in the MPU 82 will be described. The main control board 81 is provided with a clock circuit as pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and a divider circuit so as to be present in the middle of the signal path between the clock circuit and the MPU 82 Is provided.

  The divider circuit functions as frequency changing means for changing the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing by the MPU. That is, pulse signals are supplied from the divider circuit to the MPU 82 at intervals of 4 msec which is a specific cycle. The MPU 82 executes processing to confirm the occurrence of a specific signal form such as rising or falling of the pulse signal, and starts and executes timer interrupt processing under at least one condition that the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed. Do.

  In this case, when the generation of the specific signal form is confirmed in a state where activation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is changed to a state where the interrupt is permitted from the state where the interrupt is prohibited. Interrupt processing is started. That is, depending on the execution status of the process in the MPU 82, the next timer interrupt process may be started 4.1 msec after the previous timer interrupt process is started. If such an event occurs, the next process is performed. The timer interrupt process is started 3.9 msec after the previous timer interrupt process is started.

  However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed at a specific cycle such as 4 msec regardless of the progress of the process in the MPU 82, the timer interrupt process is basically started at a specific cycle. Furthermore, even if the processing configuration of the MPU 82 is started after the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined timing has passed a period exceeding a specific cycle since the previous timer interrupt processing was started, the timing next to the predetermined timing is The timer interrupt process in is absorbed by an amount exceeding that specific period, and the timer interrupt process at the next timing is set to be activated at the timing at which the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

  Now, in the timer interrupt process, first, in step S201, a power failure information storage process is executed. In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power interruption is received from the power interruption monitoring board 85, and when the occurrence of the power interruption is specified, the power failure time process is executed.

  In the subsequent step S202, a lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number updating process, the big hit random number counter C1, the support type counter C2, the first reach random number counter C3, the common charge random number counter C4, and the second reach random number counter C5 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read out from the big hit random number counter C1, the support type counter C2, the first reach random number counter C3, the general electric random number counter C4, and the second reach random number counter C5, and the read out numerical information After the process of adding 1 is executed, the process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, in step S203, the random number initial value updating process is performed as in step S111, and in step S204, the variation counter updating process is performed as in step S112. In the following step S205, a game stop determination process is executed. In the game stop determination process, when an illegal act is detected in the timer interrupt process of the previous or previous time, it is determined that the progress of the game should be stopped, and the process for advancing the game is executed. Stop. The fraud detection process is a process performed in step S211 described later.

  Thereafter, in step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped, and the processes after step S207 are executed on the condition that the progress of the game is not stopped.

  In step S207, port output processing is performed. In the port output process, when setting of output information is performed in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing an output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32c and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special winning opening 32a to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 32c for special power is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal.

  Also, when the information to switch the common use utility 34a of the operation port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for general use is started, and the information to be switched to the closed state is If it is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  In the following step S208, a reading process is performed. In the reading process, reading of signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal is executed, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  In the subsequent step S209, a winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, the signals received from the detection sensors 32e, 34c, 35c, 52a, 53a are read, and the general winning opening 31, the special winning opening 32a, the operation opening 34, the through gate 35A, 35B, the special winning A process of specifying the presence or absence of a winning on the mouth 52 and the general winning opening 53 is executed.

  In the following step S210, a timer update process is performed to collectively update numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 84. In this case, the timer counter is stored in which the stored numerical information is subtracted and updated, but both the update of the subtraction type timer counter and the update of the addition type timer counter are collectively performed. It is good also as composition.

  In the subsequent step S211, a fraud detection process is performed to monitor whether a fraud set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred. If the set cheating has occurred, it is determined that the progress of the game should be stopped in step S205 in the next timer interrupt process.

  In the following step S212, a launch control process is performed to control the launch of the gaming ball. In the situation where the firing operation is continued to the firing control device 28, as described above, one gaming ball is fired in 0.6 seconds which is a predetermined firing cycle.

  In the following step S213, as input state monitoring processing, disconnection confirmation of each detection sensor 32e, 34c, 35c, 52a, 53a based on the information read in the reading processing of step S208, the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame Check 14 for opening.

  In the following step S214, the special power control process is executed to perform the execution control of the game run and the execution control of the open / close execution mode, and in step S215, the support lottery of the common utility item 34a and the common item 34a. Execute general-purpose-general-power control processing to perform switching control.

  In the following step S216, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S214 and step S215, setting of output information for updating the display contents of the first special view display portion 38a and the second special view display portion 38b is performed, The output information for updating the display content of the common drawing display unit 39 is set.

  In the following step S217, a process for demonstration display is performed to set the display contents of the symbol display device 42 for standby display in a situation where neither the game time nor the opening / closing execution mode is executed, and in step S218 The contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S219, a payout output process for setting a winning ball command as an output target is executed.

  In the subsequent step S220, the state of signal output to external terminal board 79 is switched so as to control the start and end of output of external signals according to the processing results of various processings executed in the timer interrupt processing this time. Execute external information setting process of. In step S221, a process for editing the test shot information is executed.

  When an affirmation judging is carried out at Step S206, or after processing of Step S207-Step S221 is performed, it progresses to Step S222. In step S222, the setting of the interrupt end declaration is performed. In the MPU 82, once the timer interrupt process is activated, it is defined that setting of the interrupt end declaration is performed as one of the conditions for activating the next timer interrupt process, and in step S222, the next timer is set. In order to enable execution of interrupt processing, the interrupt end declaration is set. In step S223, interrupt permission is set. Once the timer interrupt process is activated, the MPU 82 is set to a state of interrupt prohibition, so in step S223, interrupt permission is set to enable execution of the next timer interrupt process. Thereafter, this timer interrupt processing is ended.

  Hereinafter, the special figure special power control process executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt process will be described, and the general drawing general power control process executed in step S215 will be described.

<Pu-Pu Electric control processing>
First, the general-purpose power control process executed in step S215 will be described.

  In the common drawing common control control process, when the winnings on the through gates 35A and 35B occur, processing for acquiring the holding information on the common drawing side is executed, and the holding information on the common drawing side is stored. When there is, the support occurrence determination is performed for the hold information, and the processing for performing rendering for the common drawing is executed with the support occurrence determination as a trigger. Further, based on the result of the support generation determination, processing is performed to open and close the general purpose utility product 34 a of the operation opening 34.

  Now, in the common drawing common control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 14, first, in step S301, acquisition processing of holding information on the common drawing side is executed. Here, the process of acquiring the suspension information on the general drawing side will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 15. First, in step S401, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first general drawing prize flag. . The first common prize winning flag is a flag that is set when winning is achieved through the through gate 35A provided in the left side area PE2 among the through gates 35A, 35B provided in the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3. Provided in

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S401, the first common drawing prize flag is cleared in step S402, and the first general drawing prize counter is incremented by 1 in subsequent step S403. The first common prize winning counter is provided in the RAM 84, and is incremented by one each time the initial value is "0" and the first common prize winning flag is set. The number of gaming balls passing through the through gate 35A provided in the left side area PE2, that is, the number of gaming balls passing through the ball passage opening 33a is counted by the first common figure winning counter.

  If a negative determination is made in step S401, it is determined in step S404 whether a second regular drawing prize flag is set. The second common prize winning flag is a flag which is set when winning is achieved in through gate 35B provided in right side region PE3 among through gates 35A and 35B provided in left side region PE2 and right side region PE3, and RAM 84 Provided in

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S404, the second regular drawing prize flag is cleared in step S405. If a negative determination is made in step S404, the process of acquiring the suspension information on the regular drawing side ends.

  After execution of step S403 or step S405, it is determined in step S406 whether or not the numerical value information of the general purpose generalization counter provided in the RAM 84 is "0".

  Here, in the common drawing common control control process (FIG. 14) in which acquisition processing of the suspension information on the common drawing side is performed (FIG. 14), the processing pertaining to the presentation for the common drawing, as described above, Such processing is included. In this case, as a process relating to a rendering for a common drawing, a common drawing variation start process (step S307), a common drawing variation processing (step S308), and a common drawing determination processing (step S309) are set. ing. Further, as processing related to the opening and closing of the common utility product 34a, processing during general power release (step S310) and processing during general power closure (step S311) are set.

  In such a processing configuration, the common drawing common counter is a counter for the MPU 82 to grasp which of the plurality of types of processing should be executed, and the common drawing common table provided in the ROM 83 In the address table, the start address in the program for executing the plurality of types of processing is set in correspondence to the numerical information of the common drawing / general charge counter.

  The general-purpose universal counter can set numerical information from "0" to "4", and the general-purpose universal address table is started in one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information of the general-purpose universal counter. Address information ("NSA0" to "NSA4") is set. In this case, the start address NSA0 is the start address of the program for executing the common drawing change start processing, and the start address NSA1 is the start address of the program for executing the common drawing change processing, and the start address NSA2 Is the start address of the program for executing the processing during the routine determination, the start address NSA3 is the start address of the program for executing the processing during the general release, and the start address NSA4 is during the general closure. It is the start address of the program to execute the process.

  When the processing corresponding to the numerical information stored in the current state is completed, the general drawing general electricity counter is triggered by the fact that the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied, and the general drawing generalization counter in the next processing cycle is started. One addition, one subtraction, or "0" clear is made to correspond to the process executed in the power control process. Therefore, in the generalization and generalization control process in each processing cycle, it is sufficient to execute the process according to the numerical information set in the generalization and generality counter.

  According to the above configuration, the MPU 82 can grasp which process is to be executed as the general-purpose / general-power control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. Thus, the processing can be simplified.

  That is, the case where the numerical information of the common drawing common counter at step S406 is "0" is a state where the common drawing change start process can be executed, specifically, based on the holding information on the common drawing side. It is a situation that is not in game play and not in the support execution mode.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S406, in the subsequent step S407, each numerical value information of the common power random number counter C4, the second reach random number counter C5 and the second variation type counter CS2 In the execution area 107 of FIG.

  If a negative determination is made in step S406, or after the process of step S407 is performed, a process for ceiling counting is performed in steps S408 to S413. Specifically, first, at step S408, it is determined whether or not the value of the first common drawing prize counter is "251". That is, in step S408, it is determined whether or not the number of times the game ball has entered the special character 33 reaches the ceiling 256 times soon. If an affirmative determination is made in step S408, a ceiling advance notice command is set as an output target to the sound light control apparatus 300 in step S409. The various commands set as output targets in the MPU 82 are transmitted to the control device of the output destination without executing special processing in the processing on the program of the MPU 82.

  At this time, the determination value (= 251) in step S408 is an intermediate number smaller than the number of ceilings of the big hit (= 256), and it is also possible to set a plurality of numbers smaller than "256". For example, a plurality of "241", "246", and "251" may be set, and the ceiling notice command may be set each time the number is reached.

  When the ceiling notice command is received, the sound light control apparatus 300 executes processing for setting a sound output pattern and a light control pattern corresponding to the ceiling notice command. Specifically, a data table for causing effects corresponding to the ceiling notice to be performed through the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65 is read from the ROM 303 of the sound and light control device 300, and according to the read data table The display light emission unit 63 and the speaker unit 65 perform the effect of.

  In addition, the command of the rendering system corresponding to the ceiling notice command is transmitted to the display control device 400. In the display control device 400, a data table for causing a ceiling notice to be given through the symbol display device 42 is read out, and effects for the ceiling notice are displayed according to the read data table. The effect for the ceiling notice is an effect for notifying the player that there is a high possibility of becoming a big hit by the generation of the subsequent five winnings at the through gate 35A of the left side area PE2, for example, a symbol A character for ceiling notice is made to appear in an area different from the variable display of the columns Z1 to Z3.

  If a negative determination is made in step S408, or after execution of step S409, it is determined in step S410 whether or not the value of the first plain drawing winning counter is "256". That is, in step S410, the gaming ball that has entered the special prize 33 this time has its initial value set in the first flat figure winning counter (that is, after the special winning mouth 52 has won the previous time) the 256th It is determined whether the If a negative determination is made in step S410, the process of acquiring the suspension information on the regular drawing side ends.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S410, the process proceeds to step S411, the first common drawing prize counter is cleared, and the acquisition processing of the holding information on the present common drawing side is ended.

  Returning to the description of the common-diagram general-power control process (FIG. 14), after the acquisition process of the hold information is performed in step S301, the process proceeds to step S302. In step S302, a process of reading out the information of the common map general counter is executed. In the subsequent step S303, a process of reading a common drawing and common address table is executed. Then, in step S304, processing for acquiring the start address corresponding to the information of the common drawing common counter from the common drawing common address table is executed.

  As already described, in the common drawing common control process, the common drawing change start processing, the common drawing change processing, the common drawing determination processing, the common drawing using the common drawing common counter and the common drawing common address table. Execute open processing and normal power closed processing. The configuration for executing each of these processes will be described below.

  First, in step S305, the process of setting a zero flag on the common drawing side is executed. In the process of setting the zero flag of the common drawing side, the numerical information of the common drawing common timer counter is read, and when the numerical information of the common drawing general electricity timer counter is “0”, the common drawing side provided in the register of the MPU 82 Execute processing to set “1” to the zero flag of. The common drawing common charge timer counter is a counter used to specify the update timing of the common drawing common charge counter according to the passage of time by the MPU 82, and the numerical information corresponding to the predetermined time is step S307 to step S307. While being set in each process of S311, updating of numerical information is executed in the timer updating process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13).

  In the subsequent step S306, a process of jumping (transitioning) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S304 is executed. Specifically, if the acquired start address is NSA0, the process jumps to the spread map change start process of step S307, and if the acquired start address is NSA1, the process jumps to the spread map fluctuating process of step S308. If the acquired start address is NSA2, the process jumps to the processing during step S309 of determining the common drawing, and if the acquired start address is NSA3, the process jumps to the processing during the general power release of step S310 and the acquired start If the address is NSA4, the process jumps to the processing during the pressure control closing in step S311. Then, after executing any one of the processes of step S307 to step S311, the present drawing control process ends. The processes of steps S307 to S311 will be individually described below.

<General map fluctuation start process>
First, the common drawing change start process of step S307 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the general drawing change start process, first, at step S501, it is determined whether "1" is set in the high frequency flag provided in the RAM 84 or not. The high frequency flag is a flag that is referred to when the MPU 82 specifies whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode or the low frequency support mode, and the high frequency support mode is subsequently set at the end of the open / close execution mode. When transitioning, "1" is set.

  Further, in step S502, it is determined whether the game number counter provided in the RAM 84 is "0". The number-of-games counter is a counter for specifying by the MPU 82 whether or not the number of times of the game for the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) has been digested while being set in the high frequency support mode. Incidentally, the setting of the reference number of terminations to the number-of-games counter is performed when the high-frequency support mode is subsequently set at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and the numerical value information set to the number-of-games counter is the end of the gaming round Updated to be decremented by one based on.

  If both the step S501 and the step S502 make an affirmative determination, the high frequency flag is cleared in the step S503. As a result, the support mode of the commercial electric utility 34a shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. Here, the common drawing fluctuation start processing is a situation where the numerical information of the common drawing common charge counter corresponds to the processing during the general public release and the processing during the general public closing, that is, the common electric utility 34a when the support is won. Does not run while in support execution mode. Therefore, the support mode is maintained in the high-frequency support mode even if the end reference frequency is ended during the support execution mode based on the support winning being made before the end reference frequency is ended. The support mode is switched to the low frequency support mode after the end of the execution mode.

  In the subsequent step S504, an external output setting process for high frequency cancellation is executed. In the external output setting process, the data setting of the RAM 84 is performed so that the output of the high frequency signal from the external terminal board 79 to the management computer of the game hall is stopped. The high frequency signal is output when transitioning to the high frequency support mode. Incidentally, the output stop of the high frequency signal is executed in the external information setting process of step S220 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). In step S504, the high frequency end command is set as an output target to the sound light control apparatus 300. The high frequency end command is a command for causing the sound light control device 300 to recognize that the high frequency support mode has ended.

  When negative determination is carried out in either step S501 and step S502, or after performing the process of step S504, it progresses to step S505. In step S505, it is determined whether there is a holding information on the side of the drawing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not hold information is stored in the execution area 107 for common drawing in the common drawing reservation area 106. If there is no hold information, the general-purpose drawing change start processing is ended as it is, and if there is hold information, it is determined in step S506 whether "1" is set in the high frequency flag. If the affirmative determination is made in step S506, the high frequency common-use drafting table is read out from the ROM 83 in step S507, and if the negative determination is made in step S506, the low-frequency commonity is read in step S508. Read out the chart yes / no table. After reading out the corresponding common-to-progress table in step S507 or step S508, the process proceeds to step S509.

  In step S509, a success or failure determination process is performed. In the validity determination process, the information for determination of validity stored in the execution area 107 for general drawing, that is, numerical information related to the general power random number counter C4, is referred to with reference to the common drawing success or failure table read in step S507 or S508. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to any of the success or failure results. Specifically, it is determined which of the support winning result and the outlier corresponds.

  In the subsequent step S510, processing for grasping the fluctuation display time and the stop result is executed. When grasping the fluctuation display time, in the low frequency support mode, the current numerical information of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is read, and the numerical information of the fluctuation display time corresponding to the numerical information is read from the corresponding fluctuation display time table . More specifically, in the case of the support winning, or in the case where the second reach random number counter C5 corresponds to the reach occurrence, the variation display time table for the reach occurrence is read out to determine the variation display time. If the second reach random number counter C5 does not correspond to the reach occurrence, the variation display time table for non-reach occurrence is read out and the variation display time is determined. On the other hand, in the high frequency support mode, numerical information of a single variable display time is read out.

  In addition, when grasping the stop result, information of the stop result to be displayed on the spread map display unit 39 corresponding to the end of the game round started this time is read out from the ROM 83. In this case, the information of the stop result according to the contents of the result of the pass / fail is read.

  In the following step S511, the numerical information of the fluctuation display time read out in step S510 is set in the common drawing general power timer counter.

  In the following step S512, it is determined whether the special figure special charge counter is "0". The situation in which the special figure special power counter is “0” is a situation in which the game is not in progress based on the reserve information on the special figure side, nor in the open / close execution mode. If affirmation determination is made in step S512, in step S513, the variation command and type command according to the content of the variation display time, the content of the yes / no result, and the content of the distribution result to the sound light control apparatus 300 Set as output target of. The fluctuation command includes information on fluctuation display time. Further, the type command includes information on the game result.

  If a negative determination is made in step S512, or after the process of step S513 has been performed, in step S514, the fluctuation display is started in the general-purpose map display unit 39 of the current fluctuation start target. In the subsequent step S515, the universal drawing common counter is incremented by one. As a result, the numerical information of the common map common counter is updated from "0" to "1". Thereafter, the general map change start process is ended.

  As described above, when a negative determination is made in step S512, the fluctuation command and type command according to the contents of the fluctuation display time, the contents of the result of the pass / fail, and the contents of the distribution result are sent to the sound light control apparatus 300. While the effect of the game circulation based on the holding information on the special drawing side is being executed by having a configuration that is not set as the output target of, as a presentation of the game circulation based on the holding information on the general drawing side, It is possible to make the common drawing sub change start but not the common drawing sub change start.

<Processing during common map fluctuation>
The normal drawing variation processing of step S298 in the common drawing common control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the normal drawing fluctuating process, first, in step S601, it is confirmed whether “1” is set in the general drawing side zero flag provided in the register of the MPU 82, thereby performing the current game routine effect. It is determined whether the variable display time has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S601, the process proceeds to step S602.

  In step S602, it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the spread map display unit 39 that is the target of the variable display in the current game circulation effect. If it is not the update timing, the routine processing is ended as it is. If it is the update timing, read processing of the update content is executed in step S603. The update content is stored in the ROM 83 as an update data table, and in step S603, the update content corresponding to the update timing is read from the data table.

  In the following step S604, the update content read out in step S603 is set for the update of the common drawing display unit 39 this time. Incidentally, the process for actually updating the display content of the common view display unit 39 is executed in the display control process of step S206 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). Thereafter, the processing during this general drawing fluctuation is ended.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S601, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric power counter is "0" in step S605 as in step S512 of the common drawing change start process (FIG. 16). . If an affirmative determination is made in step S605, the final stop command for drawing is set as an output target to the sound light control apparatus 300. The final stop command is a command for causing the sound and light control device 300 to recognize that it is the timing to start the final stop display for the effect for the current game run.

  When the final stop command is received, the sound light control apparatus 300 executes processing for setting an output pattern of sound and a control pattern of light corresponding to the final stop command. Specifically, a data table for causing the effect corresponding to the final stop display to be performed through the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65 is read from the ROM 303 of the sound light control device 300, and the final stop is performed according to the read data table. The effect for display is performed by the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65. Such data table corresponds to the final stop time.

  Also, the command of the rendering system corresponding to the final stop command is transmitted to the display control device 400. The display control device 400 reads a data table for causing a final stop display to be performed through the symbol display device 42 from the command from the program ROM 403 of the display control device 400, and according to the read data table The stop result in the presentation is displayed as the final stop.

  When negative determination is carried out in step S605, or after execution of step S606, it progresses to step S607. In step S 607, read processing of the stop result is executed. In the read process, information on the stop result set in the RAM 84 in step S510 of the common drawing change start process (FIG. 16) at the start of the current game run is read. In the subsequent step S608, the information on the read-out stop result is set for updating of the spread map display unit 39 corresponding to the presentation for the current game run.

  In the following step S609, the information of the single final stop time (for example, 0.6 sec) stored in advance in the ROM 83 is read out, and the information of the final stop time is set in the universal drawing common timer counter. Then, after the universal drawing common counter is incremented by one in step S610, the general floating process is ended. In this case, the numerical information of the common map common counter is updated from “1” to “2”.

  As described above, when a negative determination is made in step S605, the final stop command for a general drawing is not set as an output target to the sound light control apparatus 300, so that the special drawing side is suspended. While the game display effect based on the information is being executed on the symbol display device 42, the common drawing sub-variation ends but the common drawing sub-variation ends as an effect for the game circulation based on the hold information on the general drawing side It will be possible not to

<Process during determination of generic drawing>
In the ordinary drawing determination process of step S309 in the ordinary drawing general control control process (FIG. 14), as shown in the flowchart of FIG. It is determined whether the set final stop time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the zero flag is set to "1" for the determination process.

  If the final stop time has not elapsed, the processing under determination of this general drawing is ended as it is, and if the final stop time has elapsed, the support that triggered the current variable display in step S702. It is determined whether or not the result of the pass / fail judgment for is the support winning. When it is not a support winning, in step S703, the numerical information of the common drawing general counter is cleared to “0”, and then the present general drawing determination process ends. If the support has been won, the process proceeds to step S704.

  In step S704, "1" is set in the common charge release counter provided in the RAM 84, and "10" is set in the common charge prize counter provided in the RAM 84 in step S506. The general public release counter is a counter for specifying the remaining open number of the general electric utility 34a in the current support execution mode by the MPU 82, and the general electric winning counter has a winning on the operation port 34 in the current support execution mode. It is a counter for specifying with MPU82 whether it generate | occur | produced for the upper limit number of objects.

  In the following step S706, processing is performed to set the support flag provided in the RAM 84 to "1". The support flag is a flag for the MPU 82 to specify that the support execution mode is in progress, and is cleared in the routine during power close (step S301) when the support execution mode is ended.

  After the process of step S706 is performed, numerical value information of the open continuation time (specifically, 5 sec) is set in the following diagram in step S707.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the support execution mode is ended depending on either the upper limit number of ten game balls winning in the operation opening 34 or the lapse of 5 seconds. In this case, since the opening continuation time is set longer than the firing cycle, at least one winning combination can be expected, but the product of the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the gaming ball and the upper limit number is greater than the opening continuation time Because it is also short, it is not possible to expect winnings of the game balls for the upper limit number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball and suppress the shooting emotion while making it possible to win a prize in the operation port 34 which becomes a transition opportunity to the open / close execution mode when the support is won.

  In the subsequent step S 708, it is determined whether the special figure special power counter is “0”, as in step S 512 of the common drawing change start process (FIG. 16) and step S 605 of the common drawing fluctuation process (FIG. 17). .

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S 708, an opening command is set as an output target to the sound light control apparatus 300 in step S 709. The opening command is a command for causing the sound and light control device 300 to recognize that the general electric utility product 34a is shifted from the closed state to the open state as a result of the support winning.

  When the sound and light control apparatus 300 receives an opening command for general drawing, the sound and light control apparatus 300 executes processing for setting an output pattern of sound and a control pattern of light corresponding to the opening command. Specifically, an effect corresponding to the transition from the closed state to the open state is performed through the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65 in response to the support winning result being taken as a trigger. The data table of is read out from the ROM 303 of the sound light control apparatus 300, and the effect for the support execution mode is performed by the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65 according to the read data table.

  Also, the command of the rendering system corresponding to the opening command is transmitted to the display control device 400. Based on the command, the display control device 400 causes the symbol display device 42 to produce an effect corresponding to the transition of the commercial item 34a from the closed state to the open state triggered by the support winning result. The data table for reading is read out from the program ROM 403 of the display control device 400, and the effect for the support execution mode is executed by the symbol display device 42 according to the read data table.

  If a negative determination is made in step S708, or after execution of step S709, the general drawing variation start process is ended after adding 1 to the common drawing common charge counter in step S710. In this case, the numerical information of the common map general counter is updated from "2" to "3".

  As described above, when a negative determination is made in step S 708, the opening command for a general drawing is not set as an output target to the sound light control device 300, so that the pending information on the special view side is obtained. While the effect based on the game time is being executed on the symbol display device 42, it is possible to prevent the effect for the support execution mode based on the holding information on the side of the drawing.

<Pu-Peng release processing>
In the process of releasing the common power in step S310 in the normal power control process (FIG. 14), a process for maintaining the open state of the common power utility 34a is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open duration time of the commercial item 34a has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in the determination, it is determined whether or not the upper limit number (specifically, 10) of game balls have won in the operation opening 34. If a negative determination is made in the determination of the number of winnings, or if a winning on the operation port 34 is not detected, the processing for the general purpose power transmission is ended. Also, when the open continuation time has elapsed or when the upper limit number is won, the numerical value information of the common charge open counter is updated so as to be decremented by 1, and the numerical information of the common charge open counter is "0". Exits support execution mode. Then, after adding 1 to the numerical value information of the common drawing common charge counter, the processing in the general public open circuit is ended. In this case, the numerical information of the common map common counter is updated from "3" to "4".

<Puden closed processing>
In the routine control during closing routine of step S311 in the routine diagram control processing (FIG. 14), the routine for shifting the common utility item 34a from the open state to the closed state is executed. After that, the universal drawing universal counter is cleared to "0".

<Special figure special power control process>
Next, the special figure special power control process executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) will be described.

  In the special figure special power control process, when winning is generated in the operation opening 34 or the special winning opening 52, a process for acquiring the special information side holding information is executed, and the special information side holding information is stored. When it is judged that the hold information is judged, the judgment for the special drawing is made, and the judgment for the judgment is used as a trigger to execute the processing for performing the presentation for the game. In addition, based on the result of the success or failure determination, processing to shift to the opening and closing execution mode after the effect for the game cycle is executed. Furthermore, the processing in the open / close execution mode is executed. However, in the present embodiment, with respect to each winning of the operation opening 34 and the special winning opening 52, the number of possible holdings of the winnings (the number of possible holdings of the special view side) is “1” respectively. When the suspension information is stored in the special map reservation area 103 and the second special image reservation area 104, the reservation based on the second winning combination is not performed.

  Now, in the special figure special power control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19, first, in step S801, a special information side reserve information acquisition process is executed. Here, the acquisition processing of the suspension information on the special view side will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 20. First, in step S901, "1" is set to the first special view prize flag provided in the RAM 84. Determine if there is. The first special view winning flag is set when a winning to the special winning opening 52 is specified in the winning detection process of step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13).

  If "1" is set in the first special figure prize flag, the first special figure prize flag is cleared in step S902. In the following step S903, it is determined whether the total number PS1 of the first special view side holding information stored in the first special view holding area 103 is "0". If it is "0", the total number PS1 of the suspension information on the first special view side is incremented by 1 in step S904, and the jackpot random number counter C1 updated in step S202 immediately before in step S905, support Each numerical value information of the type counter C2 and the first reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first special view reservation area 103.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, a negative determination is made in step S903, or if the process of step S905 is performed, the process proceeds to step S906. In step S906, it is determined whether "1" is set in the second special figure prize flag provided in the RAM 84 or not. The second special view prize flag is set when a prize to the operation port 34 is specified in the prize detection process of step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13).

  If "1" is not set in the second special figure prize flag, the main acquisition process is ended as it is, and if "1" is set in the second special figure prize flag, the second special figure prize flag is selected in step S907. Clear the special feature winning flag. In the following step S 908, it is determined whether the total number PS 2 of the hold information on the second special view side stored in the second special view hold area 104 is “0”. If it is "0", it is determined in step S909 whether "1" is set in the second special figure executing flag provided in the RAM 84 or not. The second special figure executing flag is set when moving the holding information stored in the second special figure holding area 104 to the special drawing execution area 105, and the end of the special drawing sub variation based on the holding information It is a flag cleared at the time of the end, when it shifts to the opening and closing execution mode on the basis of the hold information or at the time of.

  If "1" is not set in the flag under execution of the second special figure, the total number PS2 of the hold information on the second special figure side is incremented by one in step S910. In the subsequent step S911, the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the support type counter C2 and the first reach random number counter C3 updated in the immediately preceding step S192 is stored in the second special view reservation area 104.

  If a negative determination is made in step S908 or step S909, or after execution of step S910, the present acquisition processing is ended.

  Returning to the description of the special view special power control process (FIG. 19), after the acquisition process of the special view side hold information in step S801, the process proceeds to step S802. In step S802, a process of reading information of the special view special charge counter provided in the RAM 84 is executed. In the following step S803, processing for reading the special figure special power address table from the ROM 83 is executed. Then, in step S804, processing is performed to acquire the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special charge counter from the special figure special charge address table.

  Here, the processing content of step S802 to step S804 will be described.

  As described above, the special view special power control process includes a process relating to an effect for game circulation and a process relating to the open / close execution mode. In this case, as the processing related to the effects for the game use, the special figure fluctuation start process (step S 807), which is a process for starting the effects for the game use, and the processing for promoting the effects for the game use. A special figure changing process (step S 808) and a special figure determining process (step S 809) which is a process for ending an effect for game circulation are set. Also, as the processing related to the opening / closing execution mode, the special power start processing (step S810) which is processing for controlling the opening of the opening / closing execution mode, and the special power processing which is processing for controlling the open state of the special winning opening 32a. Processing during opening (step S811), processing during special electric power closing (step S812) which is processing for controlling the closing state of the big winning opening 32a, ending in the opening / closing execution mode, and gaming state at the end of the opening / closing execution mode And a special power termination process (step S813), which is a process for controlling the transition of the image.

  In such a processing configuration, the special figure special charge counter is a counter for the MPU 82 to grasp which of the plurality of types of processes should be executed, and the special figure special charge address table A start address in a program for executing the plurality of types of processing is set corresponding to the numerical information of the special charge counter.

  The special figure special power address table will be described. The special figure special power counter can set numerical information of “0” to “6”, and the special figure special power address table has one pair for each numerical information of the special figure special power counter. The start address information (“PSA 0” to “PSA 6”) is set corresponding to 1 in FIG. In this case, the start address PSA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure change start process, and the start address PSA1 is the start address of the program for performing the special figure change processing, the start address PSA2 Is the start address of the program for executing the special view determination process, the start address PSA3 is the start address of the program for executing the special power start process, and the start address PSA4 is the special charge open process. The start address of the program for performing the process, the start address PSA5 is the start address of the program for performing the special electric power closing process, the start address PSA6 is the start address of the program for performing the special electric power end process .

  The special figure special power counter performs special figure special power control in the next processing cycle when the condition for updating the numerical value information is satisfied when the process corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is finished. It is updated according to the process executed in the process. Therefore, in the special figure special power control process in each processing cycle, the process according to the numerical information set in the special figure special power counter may be executed.

  In the following, using special chart special power counters and special chart special power address tables, special figure fluctuation start processing, special figure fluctuation middle processing, special figure finalization processing, special power start processing, special power open processing, special electricity closed processing and While demonstrating the process structure for performing an electric power termination process, the process structure of each process is demonstrated concretely.

  After the process of step S804 is performed, in step S805, a process of setting a zero flag on the special view side is performed. In the special flag side zero flag setting process, the numeric information of the special signal special power timer counter is read, and when the numerical information of the special signal special power timer counter is "0", the special flag side zero flag provided in the register of the MPU 82 Execute processing to set “1” to. The special view special charge timer counter is a counter used to specify the update timing of the special view special charge counter according to the passage of time by the MPU 82, and the numerical information corresponding to the predetermined time is that of steps S807 to S813. While being set in each process, updating of numerical information is executed in the timer updating process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13).

  In the following step S806, processing for jumping (transitioning) to the processing indicated by the start address acquired in step S804 is executed. Specifically, if the acquired start address is PSA0, the process jumps to the special map change start process of step S807, and if the acquired start address is PSA1, the process jumps to the special map change processing of step S808. If the acquired start address is PSA2, the process jumps to the processing during special image determination in step S809. If the acquired start address is PSA3, the process jumps to the specific power start process in step S810, and the acquired start address is If it is PSA4, the process jumps to the processing during release of special power in step S811, and if the acquired start address is PSA5, the process jumps to the processing during closure of special power in step S812, and if the acquired start address is PSA6 The process jumps to the special power termination process of step S813. When the process of step S 807 to step S 813 is executed, the present special figure special power control process ends.

  The processes of steps S807 to S813 will be individually described below.

  In the special figure fluctuation start process executed in step S807, the large amount of the suspension information is on the condition that the suspension information on the special figure side is on hold (at least one of PS1 and PS2 is 1). A propriety determination process is performed to determine whether or not the player is compatible with winning. When the special drawing side holding information is not held and stored, the special drawing change start process is ended as it is.

  In addition to the success or failure judgment processing, when the held information does not correspond to the big hit, the reach judgment processing is executed to judge whether or not the held information corresponds to the reach occurrence, and at that time The selection process of the continuation time which selects the continuation time of the game time is executed using the numerical information of the first variation type counter CS1 in. Then, while transmitting the variation command including the information of the duration and the type command including the information of the game result to the sound light control device 300, the pattern of the first special view display portion 38a or the second special view display portion 38b Start variable display. As a result, one game cycle is started, and the special game display unit 38 and the symbol display device 42 start producing effects for the game cycle. After that, the special view special charge counter is incremented by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the special view special charge counter from "0" to "1".

  In the special figure changing process executed in step S808, it is determined whether or not the display continuation time in the current game circulation effect has passed. If an affirmative determination is made in the determination, the determination command is set as an output target. The confirmation command is a command for causing the sound and light control device 300, which is the control device on the sub side, to recognize that it is the timing to start the confirmation display for the current game effect. Thereafter, by adding 1 to the special figure special power counter, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is updated from “1” to “2”. In addition, when the display continuation time in the presentation for the current game run has not elapsed, the update processing of the display contents of the special view display unit 38 is executed, and the value of the special view special charge counter is not updated, The process is finished during this special map change.

  In the special figure determination processing executed in step S809, it is determined whether or not the determination time in the current game circulation effect has passed. If a positive determination is made in the determination, it is determined whether or not the success or failure determination result that has triggered the current game round is the jackpot result. When the result of the determination is a big hit result, the opening command is set as an output target, and the opening time is set as the special signal special power timer counter. The opening command is a command for causing the sound light control apparatus 300, which is the control apparatus on the sub side, to recognize that it is the timing for starting the effect for the open / close execution mode. After that, the special view special charge counter is incremented by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the special view special charge counter from "2" to "3", and the process is ended while this special view determination is made. In addition, when the result of the success or failure judgment that triggered the current game round is a deviating result, the special figure special power counter is cleared to “0”, and the special figure determination process is ended.

  In the special power start process executed in step S810, it is determined whether the opening time in the current opening / closing execution mode has elapsed. If a positive determination is made in the determination, information on the open continuation time is set, and an open setting process for opening the large winning opening 32a is executed. Thereafter, by adding 1 to the special figure special power counter, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is updated from "3" to "4", and the special power start process is ended. Also, when the opening time has not elapsed, the present electric power start process is ended as it is.

  In the processing during the special power release performed in step S811, it is determined whether the open continuation time in the current round game has passed. If a negative determination is made in the determination, it is determined whether or not the upper limit number (specifically, 10) of game balls in the current round game has won the large winning opening 32a. In the determination of the number of winnings, when the negative determination is made or when the winnings to the special winning opening 32a are not detected, the processing during the special power release is ended as it is. Also, when the open continuation time has elapsed or when the upper limit number is won in the current round game, the round counter provided in the RAM 84 and storing the number of rounds is decremented by 1, and then the information on the closing time is set. A closing setting process for closing the winning opening 32a is executed. After that, the special view special charge counter is incremented by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the special view special charge counter from "4" to "5", and the process during the present special charge open is ended.

  In the special electric power closing process executed in step S812, it is determined whether all round games in the current opening and closing execution mode have ended. In the determination, when the negative determination is made, the upper limit number of winnings (specifically, 10) for the special winning opening 32a in the round game is set in the special figure winning counter provided in the RAM 84, and the information of the opening time Is set, and an opening setting process is performed to open the special winning opening 32a.

  If the round game has not ended, it is determined whether the closing time of the special winning opening 32a has elapsed. When affirmation determination is carried out by the said determination, the prize-winning upper limit number in a round game is set, and the setting process of the open time of the big prize mouth 32a is performed. After that, the special information special electric power counter is decremented by 1 to update the numerical information of the special electric special electric energy counter from "5" to "4", and the special electric power closed process is ended. If the closing time of the special winning opening 32a has not elapsed, the processing during the closing of the special power supply is ended.

  If the round game is over, the ending command is set as the output target. The ending command is a command for causing the sound light control apparatus 300, which is a control apparatus on the sub side, to recognize that it is a timing to start an effect for ending. After that, the special view special charge counter is incremented by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the special view special charge counter from "5" to "6", and the process during the special charge closing is ended.

  In the special power termination process executed in step S813, it is determined whether the ending time has elapsed. When an affirmative determination is made in the determination, the gaming state is confirmed by referring to the flag of the RAM 84, and the support mode corresponding to the confirmed gaming state is set. Thereafter, the numerical information of the special drawing special power counter is cleared to “0”, and the special electric power termination process is ended.

<Special chart change start process>
Next, the special figure change start process of step S807 will be specifically described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not hold information is stored in the first special map hold area 103 or the second special map hold area 104. If any hold information is not stored, the special map change start process is ended as it is. If the hold information is stored in any of them, the data setting process is executed in step S1002.

  In the data setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22, it is first determined in step S1101 whether or not hold information is stored in the second special view hold area 104. If a negative determination is made, the total number PS1 of the suspension information on the first special view side is cleared to "0" in step S1102. In the subsequent step S 1103, the hold information stored in the first special drawing hold area 103 is moved to the special drawing execution area 105.

  Thereafter, in step S1104, the second special view flag provided in the RAM 84 is cleared. The second special view flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the execution target of the game circulation is the hold information acquired based on the winning on the operation opening 34. Thereafter, the data setting process is ended.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, the total number PS2 of the hold information on the second special view side is cleared to "0" in step S1105. In the subsequent step S1106, the hold information stored in the second special view hold area 104 is moved to the special view execution area 105. In the following step S1107, the second special figure under execution flag is set to "1". In the following step S1108, "1" is set in the second special view flag. Thereafter, the data setting process is ended.

  As described above, by performing the determination process of step S1101 first, when the hold information is stored in the second special view hold area 104, it is stored in the first special view hold area 103. The hold information stored in the second special view hold area 104 is prioritized as a target of the success / failure determination (that is, a start target of the game play) rather than the hold information.

  Returning to the description of the special view change start process (FIG. 21), after the process of step S1002 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, it is determined whether or not the second special drawing flag is “0”, based on the hold information acquired when the current variation start target is triggered by the winning of the special winning opening 52 (No. (1) It is determined whether or not the special drawing side hold information).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, the pass table for the first special drawing and the distribution table for the first special drawing are read out from the ROM 83 in step S1004, and a negative determination is made in step S1003. At step S1005, the success / failure table for the second special view and the distribution table for the second special view are read out from the ROM 83. In step S1005, the high frequency flag is checked to grasp the height of the support mode, and the distribution table corresponding to the grasped support mode is read out. After the process of step S1004 or step S1005 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1006.

  In step S1006, a success or failure determination process is performed. In the success / failure determination process, referring to the success / failure table read in step S1004 or step S1005, information for determination of success / failure among the suspension information stored in the execution area 105 for special drawing, that is, the numerical value related to the jackpot random number counter C1 It is determined whether the information corresponds to any of the success or failure results. Specifically, it is determined which of the jackpot result and the outlier result falls under.

  In the following step S1007, it is determined whether or not the result of the success or failure determination process in step S1006 corresponds to a big hit, and if it corresponds, the process proceeds to step S1008.

  In step S1008, distribution determination processing is performed. In the distribution determination process, information for distribution determination among the suspension information stored in the special drawing execution area 105 with reference to the distribution table read in step S1004 or step S1005, that is, the support type counter C2 It is determined whether or not the numerical value information pertaining to corresponds to which distribution result. Specifically, it is determined which of the high frequency result and the low frequency result is applicable.

  In the following step S1009, it is determined whether the result of the distribution determination process of step S1008 is a low frequency result. If the result is a low frequency result, the low frequency result flag provided in the RAM 84 is set to "1" in step S1010. If the result is not the low frequency result, the high frequency result flag is set to "1" in step S1011.

  If it does not correspond to jackpot winning in step S1007, the second special figure executing flag is confirmed in step S1012, and if "1" is set, it is cleared and not set. In that case maintain that state.

  After the process of step S1010, step S1011, or step S1012, the acquisition information setting process is performed in step S1013, and the present special map change start process is ended.

  Here, the acquisition information setting process of step S1013 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, a process of grasping the fluctuation display time and the stop result is executed. When grasping the fluctuation display time, grasp the height of the support mode and grasp the numerical information of the corresponding fluctuation display time. However, even in the low frequency support mode, when in the support execution mode, numerical information of a single variable display time corresponding to the high frequency support mode is grasped. That is, during the low frequency support mode, for example, when a transition to the support execution mode is made based on the winning of the through gate 35A and a winning on the operation port 34 occurs, the fluctuation display time (0. 64 sec) is selected. As a result, it is possible to suppress an interval due to an increase in the variable display time in the winning of the operation port 34 which substantially results in a big hit.

  In addition, when grasping the stop result, information of the stop result to be displayed on the special view display portions 38a and 38b corresponding to the case where the game round started this time is ended is read from the ROM 83. In this case, the information of the stop result according to the contents of the result of the pass / fail and the contents of the distribution result is read out. In the following step S1202, numerical information of the variable display time read out in step S1201 is set in the special figure special power timer counter.

  In the following step S1203, it is determined whether "1" is set in the support flag. The case where the positive determination is made in step S1203 is the case where the current hold information corresponds to the winning of the operation port 34 or the special winning port 52 that has occurred in the support execution mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if it corresponds to a winning on the operation port 34 or the special winning port 52 generated outside the support execution mode, the content of the fluctuation display time in the following step S1204, the result of the pass / fail The variation command and type command according to the content and the content of the distribution result are set as output targets to the sound light control apparatus 300. The fluctuation command includes information on fluctuation display time. Further, the type command includes information on the game result.

  When receiving the variation command and the type command, the sound light control apparatus 300 executes processing for setting a sound output pattern and a light control pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command. Specifically, a data table for causing effects corresponding to the current game play to be performed through the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65 is read from the program ROM 403 of the sound and light control device 300, and according to the read data table The effect of the game cycle is performed by the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65. The data table corresponds to the fluctuation display time of the current game run.

  In addition, a command of a rendering system corresponding to the current variation command and the type command is transmitted to the display control device 400. In the display control device 400, the type of effect for the current game cycle is grasped from the command, and a data table for the display effect corresponding to the type to be performed through the symbol display device 42 is displayed in the display control device 400. The program display 403 reads out from the program ROM 403 and causes the symbol display device 42 to produce effects according to the read out data table.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, or after the process of step S1204 is performed, in step S1205, the variation display is started in the special figure display portions 38a and 38b of the variation start target this time. In the subsequent step S1206, the special figure special charge counter is incremented by one. As a result, the numerical information of the special view special charge counter is updated from "0" to "1". Thereafter, the present acquisition information setting process is ended.

  As described above, when a negative determination is made in step S1203, the fluctuation command and type command corresponding to the contents of the fluctuation display time, the contents of the result of the approval and the contents of the distribution result to the sound light control apparatus 300 In the configuration not set as the output target of, as special effects based on the holding information on the special drawing side acquired in the support execution mode, the special drawing main fluctuation is started, but the special drawing sub fluctuation is started It is possible to prevent it. In this case, at the time of transition to the support execution mode, an effect that combination formation of the same symbol is already made in the common figure sub change is performed, and in such a case, the same effect is further performed in the special figure sub change Without it, it is possible to suppress the delay of the effect.

<Special power termination processing>
Next, the electric power termination process of step S813 in the special figure electric power control process (FIG. 19) will be specifically described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1301, it is determined whether the ending time has elapsed by checking whether "0" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the MPU 82. If the ending time has not elapsed, the main power termination processing is ended, and if the ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1302.

  In step S1302, it is determined whether the high-frequency result flag in the RAM 84 is set to "1". As described above, the high frequency result flag is one of the jackpot results in the special figure side's success / failure determination processing, and is set to “1” when the high frequency result is obtained in the distribution determination processing.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, the high frequency flag of the RAM 84 is set to "1" in step S1303. When the high frequency flag is already set to "1", the state is maintained. As a result, the support mode after the open / close execution mode becomes the high frequency support mode. Further, in the subsequent step S1304, "100" which is the end reference number is set in the game number counter of the RAM 84.

  Thereafter, in step S1305, external output setting processing of the high frequency signal is executed. In the external output setting process, the data setting of the RAM 84 is performed so that the output of the high frequency signal from the external terminal board 79 to the management computer of the game hall is started. This makes it possible to recognize that the high frequency support mode is in progress in the management computer of the gaming hall. Incidentally, the output start of the high frequency signal is executed in the external information setting process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). In step S1305, the high frequency command is set as an output target to the sound light control apparatus 300. The high frequency command is a command for making the sound and light control device 300 recognize that the high frequency support mode has been entered.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1302, the high frequency flag in the RAM 84 is cleared in step S1306. If the high frequency flag is already "0", the state is maintained. As a result, the support mode after the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency support mode. In the subsequent step S1307, the game number counter in the RAM 84 is cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, in step S1308, an external output setting process for high frequency cancellation is executed. In the external output setting process, the same process as step S504 in the common drawing change start process (FIG. 16) is executed.

  After executing the processing of step S1305 or step S1308, in step S1309, the numerical information of the special view special charge counter is cleared to "0", and after the flag clear processing is performed in step S1310, the special charge termination process is performed. Finish. In the flag clear process, a process of clearing the second special figure flag, the high frequency result flag, the low frequency result flag, and the second special figure in-progress flag is executed.

<Effect determination process executed by the sound light control device 300>
Next, the effect determination process executed by the sound and light control device 300 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect determination process is activated periodically (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec) by the sound and light control device 300.

  First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation command and type command at the time of general drawing fluctuation (general drawing prize winning) are received. If these commands are received, it is determined in step S1402 whether or not the low frequency support mode is in progress. The MPU 302 of the sound / light control apparatus 300 receives the high-frequency command from the MPU 82 of the main control device 71 in the command response process activated every time a command is received, thereby setting the high-frequency flag provided in the RAM 304 to “1”. Is set, and the high frequency flag is cleared by receiving the high frequency cancellation command from the MPU 82 of the main control device 71. In step S1402, it is possible to determine whether or not the low frequency support mode is in progress by confirming the high frequency flag. In the case of the high frequency support mode, the process at step S1403 to step S1405 due to the reception of the variation command at the time of common drawing variation and the type command is not performed.

  If it is determined in step S1402 that the low frequency support mode is selected, predetermined symbol determination processing is executed in step S1403 based on the contents of the type command for general drawing fluctuation. In this case, the combination of the stop symbols is determined depending on whether or not the game result of the game round started this time is the support winning. Specifically, in the case of support winning, the combination of stop symbols is determined so that the combination of the same symbol is formed on any of the valid lines, and in the case of no support winning on any of the valid lines. Also, determine the combination of stop symbols so that the same symbol combination is not formed.

  Thereafter, in step S1404, processing for determining an effect pattern of the current game run is executed. In this case, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation command and type command currently received is referred to by referring to the effect table for fluctuation of ordinary drawing stored in advance in the ROM 303 of the sound and light control device 300 The period) is selected, and the contents of the presentation are selected. In the sound light control device 300, according to the effect pattern determined in step S1404, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 63 in the current game round accompanied by the common drawing prize is performed, and the output control of the speaker unit 65 is performed.

  In the subsequent step S1405, a stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step S1403 and a pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step S1404 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 400. In the display control device 400, based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the data table for performing the effect for the present game circulation with the symbol display device 42 is read out from the program ROM 403 in the display control device 400. According to the data table, the drawing list is output to the VDP 405 in the display control apparatus 400 each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, in a cycle of 20 msec) is reached. As a result, in the symbol display device 42, effects for the game circulation are executed according to the effect pattern determined by the sound and light control device 300, and the determined stop result is finally stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, when it is not the low frequency support mode but the high frequency support mode at step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1406. In step S1406, based on the content of the type command currently received, it is determined whether or not a support win is made. If the support has been won, the jackpot notification process is executed in step S1407.

  The jackpot notification process is a process for performing a jackpot notification when shifting to the support execution mode or the opening / closing execution mode during the high frequency support mode. As already explained, the common sub-variation is not performed during the high frequency support mode. Then, the jackpot notification described above is performed only in the game times when the transition to the support execution mode or the opening / closing execution mode is performed. Specifically, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 63 is performed so that the effect corresponding to the big hit notification is performed, and the output control of the speaker unit 65 is performed. In step S1407, a jackpot notification command is output to the display control device 400. Based on the received jackpot notification command, the display control device 400 reads from the program ROM 403 a data table for the jackpot notification effect to be performed by the symbol display device 42, and according to the data table, predetermined image update timing The drawing list is output to the VDP 405 each time

  If a negative determination is made in step S1401 or step S1406, or after the process of step S1405 or step S1407 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1408. In step S1408, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation command and type command at the time of special figure fluctuation (at the time of special figure winning) are received. If these commands have been received, it is determined in step S1409 whether the low frequency support mode is in progress. Such processing is similar to the processing of step S1402.

  If it is in the low frequency support mode, it is determined in step S1410 whether or not the common drawing sub-change is being executed based on the change command upon general drawing fluctuation and the type command.

  If the common drawing sub-variation is not being executed, predetermined symbol determination processing is executed in step S1411 based on the contents of the type command for special-figure fluctuation. In this case, the combination of the stop symbols is determined depending on whether or not the game result of the game round started this time is the jackpot result. Specifically, in the case of the jackpot result, the combination of the stop symbols is determined so that the combination of the same symbol is formed on any of the activated lines, and if it is not the jackpot result, on any activated line Also, determine the combination of stop symbols so that the same symbol combination is not formed.

  Thereafter, in step S1412, processing for determining an effect pattern of the current game run is executed. In this case, the variation display time corresponding to the currently received variation command and type command is referred to by referring to the special-figure variation presentation table stored in advance in the ROM 303 of the sound and light control device 300. The period) is selected, and the contents of the presentation are selected. In the sound light control device 300, according to the effect pattern determined in step S1412, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 63 in the current game round accompanying the prize drawing win is performed, and the output control of the speaker unit 65 is performed.

  Here, the effect table for general pattern change time and the effect table for special image change time will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

  As an effect table for common drawing fluctuation stored in the ROM 303, the addresses As (1) to As (x) to which the MPU 302 refers and the effect patterns Ds (1) to Ds (x) are associated one to one. It is done. Further, as the effect table for special figure fluctuation, the addresses Ap (1) to Ap (y) to which the MPU 302 refers and the effect patterns Dp (1) to Dp (y) are associated one-on-one. Then, in step S1404 or step S1412, referring to the received command for variation and type command, the effect pattern of the game is determined by referring to the address corresponding to these commands.

  In the following step S1413, a stop result command corresponding to the processing result in step S1411 and a pattern command corresponding to the processing result in step S1412 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 400. In the display control device 400, based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the data table for performing the effect for the present game circulation with the symbol display device 42 is read out from the program ROM 403 in the display control device 400. According to the data table, the drawing list is output to the VDP 405 in the display control apparatus 400 each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, in a cycle of 20 msec) is reached. As a result, in the symbol display device 42, effects for the game circulation are executed according to the effect pattern determined by the sound and light control device 300, and the determined stop result is finally stopped and displayed.

  If it is determined in step S1410 that a common drawing sub-variation is being performed, the process advances to step S1414.

  Here, when the sound and light control apparatus 300 receives the fluctuation command and type command at special drawing fluctuation, the sound and light control apparatus 300 receives the fluctuation command and type command at common drawing fluctuation immediately before that. If the symbol display effect for symbol variation (general variation sub variation) is executed by the symbol display device 42, a request for symbol variation based on the general symbol population control in the symbol display device 42, The request for symbol variation based on the special drawing special power control will overlap. In this case, an affirmative determination will be made in step S1410, and the sound and light control device 300 determines that the effect pattern of the symbol display device 42 is based on the request for the common generation general control performed earlier. A process for replacing with one based on the control request is executed in steps S1414 and S1415.

  In step S 1414, it is determined whether the common drawing sub variation being executed corresponds to the support winning. When it corresponds to the support winning, the processing for replacing with the one based on the request of the special drawing special power control is not performed. That is, even if the request for symbol variation based on the common control control and the request for symbol variation based on the special control special control overlap, the request for the design variation based on the common control control will be support winner. If it is a request for the corresponding symbol variation, it will not be replaced with one based on the special drawing special power control requirement.

  This is because even when shifting to the support execution mode or switching to the open / close execution mode, the combination formation of the same symbol is finally stopped in any case, and the game round is ended. It is because there is no need to replace in such a situation.

  Also, in this case, no symbol variation is performed based on the request for the special figure special power control. That is, even if the special drawing port 52 corresponding to the ceiling happens to correspond to the support winning, even if it wins the special prize port 52 thereafter, the special drawing main fluctuation is performed but the special drawing sub fluctuation is not performed. . This is that the special drawing side of the special drawing side wins the jackpot result with a probability of almost 100%, and although the notification corresponding to the jackpot result (combination formation of the same symbol) has already been made, the similar result will be notified further Therefore, it is a device for preventing the player from being confused.

  Note that, as described above, also when entering the operation port 34 during the support execution mode in the low frequency support mode, only notification corresponding to the transition to the support execution mode is performed similarly. However, even in these situations, notification may be made on the special drawing side. When the winning probability on the special view side is set low, the probability of not shifting to the open / close execution mode is high even if the transition to the support execution mode is made.

  If the common drawing sub variation being executed at step S 1414 does not correspond to the support winning, then at step S 1415, effect replacement processing is executed as processing for replacing with one based on the request for the special figure special power control. .

  In the effect replacement process, it is determined which variation of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is to be replaced according to the variation display condition of the common drawing sub variation being executed, and the final stop symbol of the determined symbol row Z1 to Z3 is replaced Do the processing. In addition, when general drawing sub fluctuation being executed is replaced with special drawing sub fluctuation, processing is performed to adjust the fluctuation display time so that the sub fluctuation after the substitution ends at the end timing of the special drawing main fluctuation. .

  As described above, in this embodiment, the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured to stop the symbols in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and each symbol row In the display mode in the case where the stop is stopped, the change display is switched from the high speed fluctuation to the low speed fluctuation and then the stop display is performed. In this case, it is difficult or difficult for the player to visually recognize the changing symbol during the high speed fluctuation, and the player can visually recognize the changing symbol during the low speed fluctuation. Therefore, when replacing the symbols, if the symbols in the low-speed fluctuation symbol row or the symbol rows in the stop display are replaced, the player clearly recognizes that the replacement has been performed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the symbol replacement has been performed, priority is given to the symbols in the high-speed variation symbol row over the symbol rows during the low-speed variation and the symbol row during stop display. It is supposed to be replaced. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that replacement of a symbol has been made, thereby reducing the sense of emptiness of the effects that have been performed so far.

  However, depending on the fluctuation state of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, it may be necessary to replace the symbols of the symbol row during low speed fluctuation and the symbol rows during stop display. Specifically, in the present production replacement process, as a production pattern based on the request for special image special power control, replacement is performed to the production pattern corresponding to the big hit result (or the rare result), but the big hit result It is desirable that reach display is performed as a premise of the presentation pattern of. That is, for example, if the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 have already displayed stop, and the reach line is not formed by the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3, then the final stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 in change is displayed. No matter how it is replaced, it is impossible to form a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, first, it is grasped whether or not reach display is performed in the common drawing sub change being executed, and if reach display is not performed, reach display is performed, and reach display is performed. If it is, the final stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced.

  Specifically, in the effect replacement process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 26, a process of determining whether or not the popular drawing sub-variation being executed corresponds to the reach display is performed in steps S1501 to S1503. .

  That is, first, in step S1501, the remaining fluctuation display time of the common drawing sub fluctuation is grasped. The sound and light control apparatus 300 inputs information on the fluctuation display time included in the fluctuation command upon reception of the fluctuation command and type command at the time of general fluctuation to the progress counter provided in the RAM 304. The elapsed counter is decremented by one every predetermined period and updated, and becomes 0 at the timing when the set fluctuation display time elapses. In step S1501, the remaining fluctuation display time of the common drawing sub fluctuation can be grasped by confirming the numerical information of the elapsed counter.

  In the following step S1502, the fluctuation display time of the special figure sub fluctuation is grasped. Specifically, the special view fluctuation display time is grasped based on the fluctuation command for special drawing fluctuation received this time.

  Then, in step S1503, the remaining fluctuation display time of the currently executed general drawing sub fluctuation grasped in step S1501 is compared with the fluctuation display time of the current special graphic sub fluctuation grasped in step S1502, It is determined whether the remaining fluctuation display time of the common drawing sub fluctuation is longer than the fluctuation display time of the special drawing sub fluctuation.

  Here, about the fluctuation display time of the game circulation of the common drawing side (common drawing sub fluctuation and the common drawing main fluctuation) and the fluctuation display time of the special drawing side game rotation (special drawing sub fluctuation and special drawing main fluctuation), FIG. In the low frequency support mode, the variable display time on the general drawing side selected in the common drawing variable display time table (FIG. 10 (c)) for non-reach occurrence is either It is shorter than the fluctuation display time of the special drawing side selected in the special drawing fluctuation display time table (FIG. 10A). In other words, the case where the remaining fluctuation display time of the common drawing sub fluctuation is longer than the fluctuation display time of the special drawing sub fluctuation means that the game times on the common drawing side are the game times at which the reach display occurs. The case where the remaining fluctuation display time of the common drawing sub fluctuation is shorter than the fluctuation display time of the special drawing sub fluctuation means that the game times on the common drawing side are game times in which the reach display is not generated.

  If it is determined in step S1503 that the fluctuation display time of the special drawing sub fluctuation is longer than the remaining fluctuation display time of the common drawing sub fluctuation being executed, that is, the reach display does not occur in the game times of the common drawing side under execution. If it is a game time, extension processing of the fluctuation display time of the common drawing sub fluctuation is executed in step S1504. Such processing is processing for extending the variation display time of the game run being executed, and ending the game play at the end timing of the special figure main change. Specifically, in step S1503, a time obtained by subtracting the remaining fluctuation display time of the general drawing sub fluctuation from the fluctuation display time of the special drawing sub fluctuation (special drawing main fluctuation) with respect to the numerical information of the current progress counter (period Execute processing to add numerical information corresponding to).

  For example, if the numerical information of the current progress counter corresponds to 2 seconds, the 2 seconds is the remaining fluctuation display time of the spread sub fluctuation. Since the fluctuation display time of the special drawing main fluctuation (special drawing sub fluctuation) in the low frequency support mode is 20 seconds (see FIG. 10A), in this case, the fluctuation display time of the running game is the difference An 18 sec will be extended. In this case, the relationship between the common drawing sub-variation and the special drawing sub-variation is that the fluctuation between the start of the game turn and the timing when the rendering replacement process is performed is the common drawing sub-variation, and the extended 18 sec of The fluctuation is a special figure sub fluctuation.

  After performing the process of step S1504, the symbol replacement process by timing is executed in step S1505, and then the present effect replacement process is ended.

  In the symbol replacement process according to timing, a symbol row to be replaced is determined according to the fluctuation state of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 being executed by the symbol display device 42. In this case, each information is obtained by grasping the information of the progress counter for the common drawing sub variation and the effect pattern determined in the presentation pattern determination process (step S1404) at the common drawing change of the effect determination process (FIG. 25). It is possible to grasp the fluctuation state of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In addition, when replacing the symbol, based on the type command received this time, the symbol after replacement is determined depending on whether or not it is a jackpot result.

  As already described, the case where the negative determination is made in step S1503 is that the game run on the regular drawing side in execution is a game run that does not correspond to the reach display, so in the symbol replacement process according to this timing, the symbol during high speed fluctuation Perform the process to replace the final stop design of the column with priority so that reach display is performed. In addition, when reach display can not be performed by such processing, processing is performed so that reach display can be performed by changing the symbol row during low speed fluctuation and the symbol column during stop display at high speed again. Do.

  In the process of replacing the final stop symbol during high speed fluctuation again, the effect pattern table of FIG. 26 is referred to for determining the effect pattern after the symbol replacement. Specifically, it is specified to which of the addresses As (1) to As (x) the effect pattern determined in the effect pattern determination process at the time of the general drawing change corresponds, and the variation received this time The effect pattern of the special figure sub variation corresponding to the command for type and the type command and the specified address is determined, and the final stop symbol is replaced. At the time of this replacement, the address As (n) in the rendering table for general drawing fluctuation is associated with the addresses Ap (m) to Ap (m + z) in the special drawing fluctuation table. Among the addresses Ap (m) to Ap (m + z), the addresses Ap (r) to Ap (r + s) are set as addresses of effect patterns that are continuous from the effect pattern Ds (n) corresponding to As (n). Then, in the process of replacing the final stop symbol during high speed fluctuation again, if the rendering pattern of the common drawing sub fluctuation being executed is the address As (n), referring to the fluctuation command and type command received this time An address of 1 from the addresses Ap (r) to Ap (r + s) in the effect table for special figure fluctuation is determined, and the special figure sub-variation is executed with the effect pattern after the final stop symbol is replaced. By doing this, it becomes possible to associate the effect pattern before replacement and the effect pattern after replacement as continuous effects.

  It should be noted that a plurality of special figure side addresses may not be associated with 1 of the common figure side addresses as described above, but may be configured to be associated with each other in a one-to-one manner.

  Now, in the symbol replacement process according to timing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 27, it is first determined in step S1601 whether or not the lower figure design row Z3 is in high speed fluctuation. If the lower figure design row Z3 is in high speed fluctuation, the final stop design replacement process in the lower figure design row Z3 and the middle design pattern row Z2 is executed in step S1602, and then this process is ended. In step S1602, the final stop design in the lower-level pattern row Z3 during high-speed variation is replaced so as to form a reach line with the upper pattern row Z1. Further, the game result is grasped from the type command at the time of special figure fluctuation received this time, and the final stop symbol of middle symbol row Z2 during high speed fluctuation is finally decided to become the game result at special figure fluctuation. More specifically, if it is a jackpot result, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is determined as the final stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2, and if it is the outlier, the symbol different from the symbol forming the reach line Determined as the final stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2. In this case, referring to the addresses As (1) to As (x) in the rendering table of the common drawing sub variation as described above, the rendering pattern after replacing the final stop design is determined. And while performing light emission control of the display light emission part 63 according to the presentation pattern, output control of the speaker part 65 is performed.

  Also, in step S1602, the effect replacement command is output to the display control device 400. The effect replacement command includes the information that the effect replacement is performed, the information on the final stop symbol after replacement, and the effect pattern after replacement, and the display control device 400 is based on the received effect replacement command. A data table for performing effects after replacement on the symbol display device 42 is read out from the program ROM 403, and a drawing list is output to the VDP 405 every time a predetermined image update timing is reached according to the data table.

  The case where the lower figure design row Z3 is not in high speed fluctuation in step S1601 means that the upper and lower design rows Z1 and Z3 have already stopped and the reach line is not formed. In this case, it is determined in the following step S1603 whether or not the middle symbol row Z2 is in high speed fluctuation. If the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed, processing for re-variation of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 is executed in the subsequent step S1604. In this process, the final stop symbols of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are determined so that the reach line is formed after re-variation, and the effect pattern after the re-variation is determined.

  The effect pattern table of FIG. 26 is referred to also for determination of the effect pattern after this re-variation. Specifically, it is specified to which of the addresses As (1) to As (x) the effect pattern determined in the effect pattern determination process at the time of the general drawing change corresponds, and the variation received this time The effect pattern of the special figure sub variation corresponding to the command for type and the type command and the specified address is determined, and the final stop symbol is replaced. As described above, the address As (n) in the rendering table for general drawing fluctuation is associated with the addresses Ap (m) to Ap (m + z) in the special drawing fluctuation table. Among the addresses Ap (m) to Ap (m + z), the addresses Ap (t) to Ap (t + u) are set as addresses of effect patterns not continuous from the effect pattern Ds (n) corresponding to As (n). In step S1604, if the rendering pattern of the common drawing sub variation being executed is the address As (n), an address of 1 from the addresses Ap (t) to Ap (t + u) in the rendering table for special figure variation Is determined, and the special pattern sub-variation is executed with the effect pattern after replacing the final stop design. By doing this, it becomes possible to associate the effect pattern before replacement with the effect pattern after replacement as a discontinuous effect (effect different before and after replacement). And, by performing replacement with a different effect pattern than before, it is possible for the player to increase attention by expecting that a special effect will be performed, that is, it will result in a jackpot. It becomes.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, there are cases (step S1602) in which the effect pattern having continuity with the existing effect pattern is replaced (step S1602), or there may be cases in which the effect pattern different from the effect pattern so far is replaced. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the effects and to improve interest.

  Further, in step S 1604, a re-variation command is output to the display control device 400 in order to cause high-speed variation of the upper and lower symbol rows Z 1 and Z 3 during low-speed variation or stopping again. The effect of is executed by controlling the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65. The display control device 400 having received the re-variation command reads a data table for performing re-variation of the symbol array from the program ROM 403, and draws to the VDP 405 every time the image update timing is determined in advance according to the data table. Output a list.

  In the subsequent step S1605, a process of replacing the final stop symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is executed. In this process, the game result is grasped from the type command at the time of special figure fluctuation received this time, and the final stop symbol of middle symbol row Z2 during high speed fluctuation is finally decided to become the game result at special figure fluctuation. Do. More specifically, if it is a jackpot result, the final stop symbols of upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 determined in step S1604, that is, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line, are the final stop symbols of middle symbol row Z2 If it is determined that the result is a deviation result, a symbol different from the symbol forming the reach line is determined as the final stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2. And while performing light emission control of the display light emission part 63 according to the presentation pattern for reach | attainment generation | occurrence | production, output control of the speaker part 65 is performed. Further, in step S1605, the effect replacement command is output to the display control device 400. The processing of the display control device 400 that has received the effect replacement command is as described above. However, the effect pattern in this case is an effect pattern which is different from the effect patterns thus far determined by the re-variation process (step S1604). After the process of step S1605 is performed, the present process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1603 that the middle symbol row Z2 is not moving at high speed but is moving at low speed or stopped, in step S1606, processing for re-variation processing of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is executed. This process is substantially the same as the process of step S1604. That is, the final stop symbols of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are determined so that the reach line is formed after re-variation, and the variation command and type for special drawing currently receiving the re-variation presentation pattern Determine based on the command. Then, a re-variation command is output to the display control device 400 so that the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during low-speed variation or stoppage are again subjected to high-speed variation, and effects such as sound effects are displayed when performing re-variation. This is performed by controlling the unit 63 and the speaker unit 65. The processing of the display control device 400 that has received the re-variation command is as described above.

  In the following step S1607, a process of replacing the final stop symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is executed. This process is the same process as the process of step S1605. After the process of step S1607, the present process ends.

  Returning to the description of the effect replacement process (FIG. 26), if it is determined in step S1503 that the fluctuation display time of the general drawing sub fluctuation being executed is longer than the fluctuation display time of the special drawing sub fluctuation, the processing proceeds to step S1506. Execute the process of shortening the fluctuation display time of the common drawing sub fluctuation. Such processing is processing for shortening the fluctuation display time of the game play being executed and for the game play to be ended at the end timing of the special figure main fluctuation. Specifically, in step S1506, the numerical information corresponding to the time (period) obtained by subtracting the fluctuation display time of the special drawing sub fluctuation from the remaining fluctuation display time of the common drawing sub fluctuation from the numerical information of the current progress counter Execute the process to

  For example, if the numerical information of the current progress counter corresponds to 36 seconds, the 36 seconds is the remaining fluctuation display time of the spread sub fluctuation. As described above, since the fluctuation display time of the special drawing main fluctuation (common drawing sub fluctuation) in the low frequency support mode is 20 seconds, in this case, the fluctuation display time of the game time being executed is shortened by 16 seconds which is this difference. It will be. In this case, the relationship between the common drawing sub-variation and the special drawing sub-variation is that the fluctuation between the start of the game run and the timing when the effect replacement process is performed is the common drawing sub-variation, and the subsequent fluctuation is Figure sub-variation.

  Further, as described above, in the case of making an affirmative determination in step S1503, it means that the game times on the common drawing side are the game times at which the reach display occurs. In this case, since the reach display occurs in the common drawing sub-variation being executed, the process for replacing the final stop symbols of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 and forming the reach line is not necessary. Therefore, after the process of step S1506 is performed, the process of replacing the final stop symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is performed in step S1507, and the present effect replacement process is ended. The process of step S1507 is the same as the process of step S1605 and step S1607. However, in this case, the effect pattern after replacement of the final stop symbol is determined based on the effect pattern of the common drawing sub variation being executed as in step S1607. Therefore, the presentation pattern of the reach display being executed will be replaced with the continuous presentation pattern, and the reach display up to now will not be wasted. After the process of step S1507 is performed, the effect replacement process is ended.

  As described above, in the effect replacement process in the present embodiment, depending on whether reach display is executable or not, the effect pattern is replaced with a continuous effect pattern, and an effect pattern different from the effect pattern being executed, that is, a discontinuous effect pattern Replace the production to become However, the mode of effect replacement is not limited to this, and, for example, in the case of a continuous effect pattern, the lower figure pattern row during low speed fluctuation may be slipped or suddenly stopped to perform reach display, or it may already be stopped. The reach display may be performed by replacing the symbol while hiding it in, for example, smoke without high speed fluctuation. The point is that in the case of a continuous production pattern, the production before and after replacement is in a continuous relationship (the production is continued with the same character in the same state, the production of the same story tailoring is continued, one before and after replacement If there is something that will be the effect). In addition, in the case of a discontinuous effect pattern, it may be developed into super reach of animations or moving images with the movement of a movable combination or the like, or the screen may be blacked out to be a so-called freeze effect. The point is that in the case of a non-continuous effect pattern, if the effects before and after replacement are in a non-continuous relationship (the character appearing in the effect is changed, the format is changed, or a different story tailoring effect is performed). Just do it.

  Returning to the description of the effect determination process (FIG. 25), if it is not the low frequency support mode but the high frequency support mode at step S1409, the process proceeds to step S1416. In step S1416, it is determined whether a common drawing main change is being executed. As described above, the common sub-variation is not performed during the high frequency support mode, and the jackpot notification is performed only when shifting to the support execution mode. However, the MPU 302 of the sound light control apparatus 300 can grasp it during the period in which the common fluctuation main is being executed. That is, when the numerical information of the above-mentioned progress counter to which the information of the fluctuation display time is input based on the reception of the fluctuation command and the classification command at the time of fluctuation of the fluctuation is not 0 As a period of

  If the common drawing main change is being executed, it is determined in step S1417 whether the common drawing main change corresponds to a support winning. If it does not correspond to the support winning, or if the common drawing main change is not being executed at step S1416, it is determined at step S1418 whether the current special drawing change corresponds to the jackpot result. Do. Specifically, the game result is grasped from the command for change at the time of the special map change and the type command received this time, and it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot result. If the result is a jackpot result, in step S1419, a jackpot notification process is executed.

  After executing any processing of step S1413, step S1415 and step S1419, after making an affirmative determination in step S1414 or step S1417 or after making a negative determination in step S1418, other processing is executed in step S1420. After this, the effect determination process ends.

  In the other processing of step S1420, processing for executing ceiling preview effect based on reception of the ceiling preview command, reception of opening command and ending command for common drawing and special drawing, and for the support winning time The processing for advancing the effects for the effect and the open / close execution mode is executed.

  Further, even in the high-frequency support mode, if the common drawing main variation being executed corresponds to the support winning (step S1417: YES), processing for replacing with one based on the request for the special figure electric power control (Steps S1418 and S1419) are not performed.

  Next, FIG. 29 is referred to for the relationship between the winnings on the through gates 35A and 35B (regular drawing winnings), the winnings on the operation port 34 and the special winnings opening 52 (special graphics winnings), and the variable display based on these winnings. To explain.

  First, when the regular drawing prize occurs at the timing of t1, the regular drawing main fluctuation in the general drawing display unit 39 and the regular drawing sub fluctuation in the symbol display device 42 are started. As already described, these fluctuation display times are determined in step S510 of the common drawing fluctuation start process (FIG. 16), and at the timing of t2 which is the elapsed timing of the fluctuation display time, the common drawing main fluctuation and the common drawing Sub fluctuation ends. In this case, the presentation of the common drawing main variation and the common drawing sub variation corresponds to the game result based on the common drawing prize, and for example, when the game result is the support winning, transition to the support execution mode is carried out. Opening and closing control of the electronic article 34a is started.

  The special figure winning is generated at the timing of t4 which is during the fluctuation of the common drawing main variation and the common drawing sub variation started at the timing of t3, and the special drawing main variation (special When the fluctuation display time (TA1) of the fluctuation) is longer than the remaining fluctuation display time (TA2) of the common drawing sub-variation, extension processing of the fluctuation display time of the common drawing sub-variation currently being executed is performed. As a result, even if the normal drawing main change ends at the timing of t5, the normal drawing sub change does not end. Then, the general drawing sub-variation ends at the timing of t6 when the special drawing main variation ends. In this case, as described above, basically, the effect of the common drawing sub variation ends in a state in which it is replaced with the one corresponding to the game result based on the special drawing prize. And, for example, when the game result based on the special figure winning is the big hit result, it moves to opening and closing execution mode, opening and closing control of special electric winning a prize device 32 is started.

  The special figure winning is generated at the timing of t8, which is during the variation of the common drawing main variation and the common variation sub fluctuation started at the timing of t7, and the special drawing main variation (special When the fluctuation display time (TA3) of the fluctuation) is shorter than the remaining fluctuation display time (TA4) of the common drawing sub fluctuation, the shortening processing of the fluctuation display time of the common drawing sub fluctuation currently being executed is performed. As a result, when the special figure main fluctuation ends at the timing of t9, the regular drawing sub fluctuation ends although the ordinary drawing main fluctuation does not end. In this case, as described above, basically, the effect of the common drawing sub variation ends in a state in which it is replaced with the one corresponding to the game result based on the special drawing prize. And, for example, when the game result based on the special figure winning is the big hit result, it moves to opening and closing execution mode, opening and closing control of special electric winning a prize device 32 is started. On the other hand, the general drawing sub fluctuation ends at timing t10 which is an elapsed timing of the fluctuation display time determined at the start of fluctuation of t7.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  A transition lottery to the open / close execution mode (a pass / fail judgment process on the special view side) is performed based on the game ball having entered the special winning opening 52, and a game circulation effect corresponding to the hit lottery is symbol display In the configuration performed by the device 42, a part of the gaming balls having passed the through gate 35A is configured to win a prize in the special winning opening 52, and the symbol display device 42 is also used based on the winning on the through gate 35A. It was configured to perform effects for game circulation. As a result, even in a period in which a special winning opening 52 does not have a winning (when a general winning opening 53 is winning), it is as if the player has been making a lottery for switching to the open / close execution mode. It can be shown to However, in such a configuration, in the case where a winning on the special winning opening 52 occurs while the effects for the game are being performed based on the winning on the through gate 35A, the sound and light control device 300 The request for symbol variation for producing effects for game use will be duplicated. Therefore, in such a case, in the effect replacement process (FIG. 26), the effect of the game round is replaced by the one corresponding to the winning on the special winning opening 52, and the inconvenience in the case of overlapping is eliminated. It is possible to preferably raise the degree of attention of

  In particular, in the configuration in which the special drawing main change and the common drawing main change are performed in the lottery result display unit 37, and the effect for the game circulation (special drawing sub change and the common drawing sub change) is further performed by the symbol display device 42. The transition to the open / close execution mode or the transition to the support execution mode is made in accordance with the end timing of the variable display by the lottery result display unit 37. Therefore, when replacing the effect as described above, if the end timing of the effect for the game circulation on the symbol display device 42 side does not match the transition timing to the opening / closing execution mode or the support execution mode, the following will occur. Problems may occur. That is, for example, if the stop timing of the lottery result display unit 37 is too early with respect to the end timing of the effect on the symbol display device 42 side, opening and closing for the player who is viewing not only the lottery result display unit 37 but also the symbol display device 42 This may cause frustration that does not indicate the execution mode or the transition to the support execution mode. Conversely, if the end timing of the effect on the symbol display device 42 side is too early with respect to the stop timing of the lottery result display unit 37, before the stop of the lottery result display unit 37, the opening / closing execution mode or the support execution mode The transition may be known, and the user may lose interest in seeing the effects on the symbol display device 42 side.

  Furthermore, in such a configuration, the managers of the gaming hall generally check the lottery result display unit 37 side to confirm that the result of the success or failure lottery has been made and the result thereof. It is considered to check whether there is any fraudulent action to shift to the open / close execution mode or the support execution mode based on the basis. Therefore, by setting the transition timing to the open / close execution mode or the support execution mode to the stop timing of the variable display in the lottery result display unit 37, it is possible to easily find the above-mentioned fraudulent act.

  As a specific configuration of the above, the game ball that has won the through gate 35A must enter the special role 33 without fail, and the special prize 33 can be paid to the special prize port 52 by the sorting board 54. The first passage 51 a and the second passage 51 b which can not be awarded to the special winning opening 52 are divided.

  Then, after the variation display time of the game times based on the winning on the through gate 35A passes the through gate 35A and passes the first passage 51a of the special character 33 and wins the special winning opening 52 It was set longer than the time that is assumed to be required. Thereby, when replacing the effect for game circulation (special figure sub fluctuation) based on the winning of special winning opening 52 from the effect for game circulation based on the prize for through gate 35A (general drawing sub fluctuation), It is possible to reduce the possibility that the effect of the game routine based on the winning on the through gate 35A is ended.

  That is, with the above configuration, the game ball passes through the through gate 35A and then the game ball wins the special winning opening 52, but the game is based on the winning of the through gate 35A. If the variable display time is shorter than the time required for the passage, the effect for the game cycle is started based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 35A, and the game ball wins the special winning opening 52 The presentation of another game session will be started on the basis of. Therefore, when one game ball flows down, a plurality of game rounds will be performed, and the player may feel discomfort. On the other hand, in the case of winning the special winning opening 52 by making the variable display time of the game times based on the winning on the through gate 35A longer than the period required for passing as described above, to the through gate 35A It is possible to have a configuration in which a game is played based on the prize winning, and it is possible to reduce the possibility of giving such an odd feeling as described above.

  However, when the winning on the through gate 35A occurs while the effect for the game cycle is being executed based on the winning on the through gate 35A, and the winning corresponds to the ceiling, the above-mentioned running game There is also a possibility of winning to the special winning opening 52 after the end of the round. Therefore, in this case, the effect for the game cycle is started based on the winning on the special winning opening 52 (steps S1410 to S1413). This makes it possible to avoid an event that the game play corresponding to the ceiling is not performed.

  In such a configuration, in the case of replacing the effect for the game use, according to the length of the variation display time of the game play based on the winning of the special winning opening 52, (in the winning of the through gate 35A) Based on the above configuration, the variable display time of the game time is extended or shortened. Thereby, the timing to shift to the opening / closing execution mode after the variation display time of the game turn based on the winning of the special winning opening 52 has elapsed, and the end timing of the effect for the game circulation on the symbol display device 42 side Is possible.

  The configuration is such that the transition lottery to the support execution mode (the pass / fail judgment process on the general drawing side) is performed based on the winning on the through gate 35A, and the effects for the game circulation based on the winning on the through gate 35A to the support execution mode It was made to become the contents corresponding to the transition lottery. As a result, even in the case of the game circulation effect based on the winning on the through gate 35A without the transition lottery to the open / close execution mode, the degree of attention can be increased.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, by shifting to the support execution mode, winning of the operation port 34 is permitted, and based on the winning of the operation port 34, transition to the open / close execution mode is made with almost 100% probability. Therefore, it is possible to make the transition lottery based on the winning to the through gate 35A substantially as the transition lottery to the open / close execution mode, and the effect for the game circulation accompanying the winning of any of the through gate 35A and the special winning opening 52 It is possible to make the player pay attention to the difference regardless of whether it is.

  When the lottery result of the transition lottery performed based on the winning to the through gate 35 is the support winning result, the lottery result of the transition lottery performed based on the winning to the special winning opening 52 is the big hit result and Similarly, a combination of the same symbols is formed by the symbol display device 42 and displayed in a stopped state. With such a configuration, the player has won the transition lottery to the support execution mode and has not won the transition lottery to the open / close execution mode, and the transition lottery to the support execution mode has won. And since it is displayed as the same stop result in the case of having won the transition lottery to the open / close execution mode and the case of having won any transition lottery, it is the same in the game round It solves the inconvenience that no state transitions even though a combination of symbols is formed and displayed in a stopped state, and the game is complicated due to the replacement of the stopped display in each of the above cases. I have not.

  As described above, the symbol display device 42 produces effects for the game round based on the winning of the through gate 35A and the special winning opening 52, but the result of the transfer lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35A is a common drawing Displayed on the display unit 39, the special drawing display unit 38 displays the result of the transfer lottery based on the winning on the special winning opening 52. Therefore, while playing each of the above effects, the administrator of the gaming hall, etc. must confirm that each transition lottery has been performed by checking the display portions 38 and 39, and grasp the lottery result. Can.

  In the effect replacement process (FIG. 27), the final stop symbols of the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are replaced, and thereafter the reach display is performed. That is, the effect is replaced so as to become a continuous effect pattern from the effect pattern being executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the effect of making the player feel the effect as wasted without wasting the effect of the common drawing sub variation which has been performed until then. Also, by doing this, it is possible to reduce the discomfort when replacing.

  Further, in the symbol replacement process (FIG. 28) according to timing in the effect replacement process, the variation status of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is grasped, and all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 if any of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is also in motion. The final stop symbols of the symbol are replaced, and if one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped, the symbol rows are re-varied. As a result, it is possible to avoid such a disadvantage that the reach line is not formed at the time of replacement and the reach display can not be performed.

  In the special role product 33 provided in the game area PE, in the gaming ball passing area R from the ball passing opening 33a to the special winning opening 52, the gaming ball having passed the ball passing opening 33a is first passage 51a (special winning opening Because eight (upper and lower eight stages) of the sorting plates 54 are provided to be distributed to any of the second passage 51 b (the passage that can not be won for the special winning opening 52) and the second passage 51 b (a passage that can be won for 52). Even though the game ball passes through the ball passage opening 33a, not all do not win the special winning opening 52, but only when the game balls are distributed to the first passage 51a by the respective sorting plates 54 A prize for the mouth 52 is made. In particular, each sorting board 54 changes the distribution destination of the game ball based on arrival of the game ball having passed the ball passage port 33a, and a predetermined number of game balls pass through the ball passage port 33a. Accordingly, the special winning opening 52 is shifted to a state where the game ball is to be won. That is, in order to win a game ball in the special winning opening 52 and obtain a predetermined benefit, it is one condition to pass a predetermined number of game balls in the ball passage opening 33a. In this case, it is considered that a player who plays the pachinko machine 10 actively continues the game in anticipation that a certain number of benefits will be obtained by passing a predetermined number of gaming balls in the ball passage opening 33a. This makes it possible to promote the player's continuous game.

  The special character 33 has an eight-step sorting plate 54 from the upstream side to the downstream side in the game ball passage area R, and these eight-step sorting plates 54 are played by the sorting plate 54 of the former stage among them When the balls are distributed to the first passage 51 a side, the gaming balls are respectively disposed so as to reach the distribution board 54 in the rear stage. Then, when the number of passing game balls in the ball passage port 33a reaches a predetermined number (256 in the present embodiment), all the distribution destinations of the game balls for the eight sorting plates 54 are on the first passage 51a side, The ball is shifted to a state in which the special winning opening 52 is won. In this case, the distribution board 54 of each stage changes the distribution destination alternately on the side of the first passage 51a and the side of the second passage 51b each time the game ball arrives. Therefore, in order to change the number of gaming balls required to make all the sorting destinations of each sorting plate 54 the first passage 51a side (that is, the number of balls required for winning a special winning opening 52), the sorting plate 54 The design change regarding the winning to the special winning opening 52 can be easily implemented by changing the number of stages of installation. For example, in the pachinko machine 10, to make it difficult to obtain the benefit (reduce the winning opportunity to the special winning opening 52), the number of stages of the sorting plate 54 is increased to make it easy to obtain the benefit (to the special winning opening 52) In order to increase the chances of winning, the number of installation stages of the sorting plate 54 may be reduced.

  Each sorting board 54 is a rocking body pivotally supported pivotably in the game ball passage area R, and when the game ball passes, the game ball swings to switch the distribution destination of the game ball. It is. In this case, since the distribution destination by the distribution plate 54 is not determined by electrical processing, arithmetic processing for switching the distribution destination is unnecessary, and power consumption does not occur at the time of distribution. In addition, since the electric signal is not affected, there is no inconvenience that the distribution destination is operated by an incorrect electric signal.

  The special role 33 is a special winning port 52 in which a lottery process of awarding a bonus is executed with the game ball having a game ball (the game ball having entered the special role 33) having passed through the ball passage port 33a. It distributes to either of the general winning a prize mouth 53 where the same lottery processing is not executed. According to this configuration, when the gaming ball passes through the ball passage port 33a, a winning on any of the winning openings 52 and 53 occurs, and the payout of the gaming ball can be expected with the winning. That is, for the player, some benefit is provided by the game ball passing through the ball passage opening 33a. As a result, the player is prompted to aim the passage of the game ball at the ball passage opening 33a to fire the launch device, and as a result, the number of the ball passage at the ball passage opening 33a increases, and the special prize is awarded. The winning opportunity to the mouth 52 will be increased.

  Since the winning probability of the lottery process performed when the gaming ball has won in the special winning opening 52 is 100%, the player has a high probability that the predetermined number of gaming balls pass through the ball passing opening 33a. You can get the benefits at. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to continue the continuous game.

  The winning probability of the lottery process may be 50% or more, and may be changed to a probability other than 100%, such as 50% and 80%.

  In the game area PE, the operation port 34 is provided as a winning portion on which the same lottery process (lottery process related to the opening / closing execution mode) as that for the special winning port 52 is executed. In this case, even before the game ball passes a predetermined number of minutes in the ball passage opening 33a, that is, before the game ball reaches the special winning opening 52, the game ball wins in the operation opening 34. Since the lottery process is carried out by this, it is possible to give the player in the game yet another winning opportunity. For example, immediately after the ball passing number to the ball passing port 33a reaches a predetermined number and the lottery process is performed, etc., there is a time gap until the next lottery process, and the player's willingness to continue playing is reduced. Although there is a risk that the game will be released, as described above, if the lottery process is performed by the winning of the operation port 34, the expectation of winning can be kept at any time, and the player is urged to continue the game. It becomes possible.

  A through gate 35A is provided immediately above the ball passage opening 33a which is an entrance of the special character 33 in the game area PE, and the game ball passes through the ball passage opening 33a immediately after passing through the through gate 35A. And draw lottery whether or not to grant the first benefit (game benefit in the opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the game ball passing through the ball passing port 33a and winning in the special winning port 52 On the basis of the game ball passing through the through gate 35A, it is randomly selected whether or not the second benefit (game benefit in the support execution mode) is given to the player. In this case, the player aiming the ball passage opening 33a and firing the game ball simultaneously aims at the through gate 35A. In this case, if the gaming ball passes through gate 35A, the lottery process for the second benefit is performed. In addition, when the game ball passes the ball passing opening 33a following the through gate 35A, if the number of ball passing times in the ball passing opening 33a becomes a predetermined number, the game ball wins the special winning opening 52, and The lottery process for the 2 benefits is performed. Here, for the player, the passing of the game ball at each passing portion (through gate 35A, ball passing port 33a) above increases the opportunity to obtain not only the second benefit but also the first benefit, and the will to continue the game Will increase.

  At the time of passing through the through gate 35A, the first effect (special figure sub change) determined based on the lottery result of the first benefit (game benefit in the opening / closing execution mode) at the time of winning of the ball passing port 33a or the special winning port 52 The second effect (general drawing sub variation) determined based on the lottery result of the second benefit (game benefit in the support execution mode) is configured to be implemented by the symbol display device 42. In this case, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the effect is for the first benefit or the second benefit during the execution of the effect by the symbol display device 42. Therefore, the interest in the effect of the symbol display device 42 can be raised.

  The first effect and the second effect include the same effect form. That is, in the symbol display device 42, display effects with the same background, the same character pattern, and the same character symbol are performed. For example, when variation of the variation symbol is carried out in the symbol display device 42, the same variation symbol is to be varied in both the first effect and the second effect, and only the final determined symbol is for the first effect It is good to set it as a symbol and a symbol for the second effect. This makes it more difficult to determine which of the first effect and the second effect is being performed, and can increase interest in the result of the effect.

  In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35A, the game ball is also inserted into the special character 33 immediately after that, and furthermore, the special character 33 is not visible. It has become. Therefore, it can not be determined whether the effect this time is based on the winning of the special winning opening 52 or the ball passing of the through gate 35A, and the player's attention for giving a bonus can be further enhanced.

  The expected number of winning balls is set larger for the first benefit (game benefit in the open / close execution mode) than for the second benefit (game benefit in the support execution mode). In this case, the player plays a game expecting the generation of the first benefit with a large expected number of winning balls, but can not recognize which rendering process of the first benefit and the second benefit is currently being executed. Therefore, by causing the player to expect the occurrence of the first benefit, it is possible to further raise the degree of attention to the lottery result.

  In the common drawing common control processing, it is determined that the special drawing special power counter is "0", that is, the game display based on the special drawing special power control processing is not executed in the symbol display device 42. In other words, the execution status of the special figure special power control is monitored in the normal figure general power control process. Then, when symbol variation occurs in the symbol display device 42 as the special figure special power control process, the symbol variation in the symbol display device 42 is not started as the general drawing general control process. Thereby, in the configuration in which symbol variation based on the common pattern common control process and symbol variation based on the special figure special power control process are implemented by the same symbol display device 42, the symbol variation due to the special figure special power control is halfway incomplete It is possible to suppress being interrupted at the same time, and symbol display can be implemented without a sense of discomfort. Therefore, even if the lottery of the first benefit and the lottery of the second benefit occur at random, the appropriate display effect can be performed in the symbol display device 42.

  A cover member 60 is provided to cover the respective sorting plates 54 in the special role item 33 from the front of the gaming machine, and the covering members 60 make each sorting plate 54 invisible to the player. In this case, the second passage 51b (passage where it is impossible to win the special winning opening 52) is whether the distribution destination of each sorting plate 54 is the first passage 51a (a passage which can be won by the special winning opening 52). This makes it difficult for the player to grasp whether the Although it is impossible for the player to visually recognize each sorting board 54, it is possible to recognize the presence of each sorting board 54 by the cover member 60 provided in the game area PE, and This can increase the player's attention to the distribution.

  When the sphere passage number reaches a predetermined middle number (= 251) smaller than the predetermined number in the process in which the ball passage number at the ball passage opening 33a approaches the predetermined number (= 256), to the middle number Is configured to execute notification processing for notifying the player of the arrival of In this case, it is possible for the player to easily grasp how long the special winning opening 52 will receive a game ball winning in the future, and to increase the expectation for the winning. This also makes it possible to urge the continuation of the game.

Second Embodiment
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration in which the common drawing sub-variation is replaced when reaching the ceiling. Specifically, when the first common drawing prize counter is used, the common drawing sub variation is replaced with the effect corresponding to the ceiling at the start of the common drawing sub variation when reaching the ceiling. In order to correspond to the fluctuation display time of the common drawing sub fluctuation, the fluctuation display time of the special drawing main fluctuation at the ceiling is determined. The detailed processing configuration will be described below.

<Process for obtaining hold information on the side of the common map>
First, the acquisition processing of suspension information on the common drawing side in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The process of FIG. 30 is a process to be executed in place of the process of FIG.

  In this embodiment, as in steps S401 to S409 of the first embodiment, in steps S1701 to S1709, counters C4, C5, and CS2 for common drawing based on winning on through gates 35A and 35B. Execute storage processing and ceiling notification processing. Further, in step S1710, as in step S410, it is determined whether or not the number of times of entering the special combination 33 has reached the ceiling by determining whether or not the first common drawing prize counter is "256". judge. If it has not reached the ceiling, the main acquisition process is terminated.

  If the ceiling has been reached, it is determined in the following step S1711 whether or not the general drawing common power counter is "0", and it is determined whether the general drawing main fluctuation is in a state of fluctuating display. If the common drawing common charge counter is not “0” (when the common drawing main change is in a fluctuating display), the processing of setting “1” to the ceiling replacement flag provided in the RAM 84 in the following step S1712 Run. The ceiling replacement flag is a flag for the MPU 82 to specify replacement of the currently executed common drawing sub-variation with an effect corresponding to the ceiling.

  In the following step S1713, the ceiling replacement command is set as an output target to the sound light control apparatus 300. The processing of the sound light control apparatus 300 based on the reception of the ceiling replacement command will be described in detail later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1711, or after the process of step S1713 is performed, a process of setting “1” to the ceiling flag provided in the RAM 84 is performed in step S1714. The ceiling flag is a flag for the MPU 82 to specify that the number of game balls entering the special character 33 has reached the ceiling of 256 times. Then, the ceiling flag is deleted when it is determined in step S 701 that the final stop time has elapsed in the process of determining the common drawing (FIG. 18).

  In the subsequent step S1715, the first common drawing prize counter is cleared as in step S411, and the present acquisition processing is ended.

<General map fluctuation start process>
Next, a common drawing change start process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The process of FIG. 31 (a) is a process to be executed in place of the process of FIG.

  In the present embodiment, similar to the processing of step S501 to step S509 in the first embodiment, the transition processing of the support mode and the success / failure determination processing corresponding to the support mode are executed in steps S1801 to S1809.

  In step S1810, it is determined whether "1" is set in the ceiling flag. If it is not set, in step S 1811, processing for grasping the fluctuation display time for normal use and the stop result is executed. The process of step S1811 is the same as the process of step S510.

  If “1” is set in the ceiling flag in step S1810, processing for grasping the variation display time for the ceiling and the stop result is executed in step S1812. In this process, the floating display variation display time table at the time of the ceiling is read out, and the fluctuation display time of the current spreading main fluctuation and the spread general fluctuation is determined. As shown in FIG. 31 (b), the variable display time table for common use at the time of the ceiling has a single variable display time regardless of the numerical information of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. In addition, the variable display time is a symbol display after the special winning opening 52 is won in a time (for example, 10 sec) which is assumed to be required for the special winning opening 52 to win after the gaming ball passes through the through gate 35A. It is the time which added the time required in order to perform the production for jackpots with the apparatus 42, and, specifically, it is 42 sec. On the other hand, in the process of grasping the stop result, the stop result corresponding to the result of the normality determination process (step S1809) on the current drawing side is grasped.

  After the process of step S 1811 or step S 1812 is executed, the normal variation display time determined in step S 1811 or the ceiling variation display time determined in step S 1812 is determined in step S 1813. Execute processing to set to the counter. The process of subsequent steps S1814 to 1817 is the same as the process of steps S512 to S515. However, in the present embodiment, in the case of setting the variation command for common drawing and the type command as output targets in step S1815, it is determined whether the ceiling flag is set to “1” or not. If it is determined that the common drawing sub-variation that starts this time is the common drawing sub-fluctuation at the ceiling, the information corresponding to the jackpot result is set in the above step S 1812 regardless of the common judgment result of the common drawing side. And set to include information on the variable display time. Then, in the start process of the variable display in step S1816, the variable display is started so that the stop result in the common drawing main change becomes the stop result grasped in step S1811 or step S1812. After the process of step S1817 is performed, the general drawing change start process is ended.

<Processing during common map fluctuation>
Next, the general drawing variation processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The process of FIG. 32 is a process that is executed replacing the process of FIG.

  In the present embodiment, similarly to steps S601 to S604 in the first embodiment, processing for updating the common view display unit 39 is executed in steps S1901 to S1904. If the variable display time has elapsed in step S1901, as in step S605, it is determined in step S1905 whether the special-image special power counter is "0".

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1905, in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the ceiling replacement flag is set to "1" in step S1906, and if not set, it is determined in step S1907. Set the final stop command of to the output target.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1905, if a positive determination is made in step S1906, or after the process of step S1907 has been performed, the process proceeds to step S1908. The processes of steps S1908 to S1911 are the same as the processes of steps S607 to S610. After the process of step S1911 is performed, the general-in-progress variation process ends.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the number of winnings on the through gate 35A reaches the ceiling, if the common drawing sub change is not performed, the common drawing sub change based on the hold information acquired at the time of reaching the ceiling Game times corresponding to the ceiling are executed. Specifically, a long fluctuation display time is set in advance for the common drawing sub-variation corresponding to the ceiling (steps S 1812 and S 1813), or an effect corresponding to the jackpot result is executed in advance (step S 1815).

  That is, in the present embodiment, when it is predicted that the request for symbol variation based on the regular drawing common control and the requirement for the symbol variation based on the special electric power control overlap at the time of the ceiling, The request for symbol variation based on the power control is made to be a request corresponding to the request for symbol variation based on the special drawing special power control. By doing this, it becomes possible to reduce the possibility that it becomes necessary to perform processing of changing the fluctuation display time or replacing the effects after duplication of the request of design fluctuation occurs, and processing The configuration can be simplified.

  It should be noted that the request for symbol variation based on general drawing general control as the requirement corresponding to the requirement for symbol variation based on special figure special power control in fact corresponds to the requirement for symbol variation based on special electric power control. If it is different (that is, if the special figure side's success or failure judgment is out), then the process is replaced with the process corresponding to the request of the symbol variation based on the actual special figure special power control. It will be. Such processing will be described later, but even in this case, at least change of the variable display time is not performed, and therefore, as in the first embodiment, when the duplication of the request for symbol fluctuation occurs, the variable display is performed. The processing configuration is simplified as compared with the configuration in which the time is changed and the effects are replaced.

  In addition, if the common drawing sub change is performed, an effect corresponding to the ceiling is performed by the common drawing sub change currently being executed as in the first embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, the final stop command is not output so as not to stop the currently executed general drawing sub variation. In this way, a special winning opening is made when a winning on the through gate 35A occurs and the winning corresponds to the ceiling during execution of a common drawing sub-variation based on the winning on the through gate 35A. It is possible to avoid the event that the general drawing sub-variation that has been in progress when the winning to 52 has been completed has ended. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the process (steps S1410 to S1413) in the case of occurrence of such an event as in the first embodiment, and the process configuration can be simplified.

<Acquisition information setting process>
Next, acquisition information setting processing on the special view side in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The process of FIG. 33 is a process that is executed replacing the process of FIG.

  In the present embodiment, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the low frequency support mode is in progress by confirming whether the high frequency flag is "0". If the low frequency support mode is in progress (high frequency flag = 0), then in step S2002, it is determined whether or not the common drawing common counter is "0", and the common drawing main variation is being executed. It is determined whether the If the common drawing common counter is not “0” but is executing the common drawing main change, it is determined in the following step S2003 whether “1” is set in the ceiling flag. If "1" is set in the ceiling flag, it is determined in step S2004 whether "1" is set in the ceiling replacement flag.

  If “1” is not set in the ceiling replacement flag in step S2004, the remaining change display time of the main drawing main change currently being executed is grasped in step S2005. In this processing, the remaining fluctuation display time of the common drawing main fluctuation can be grasped by reading out the numerical information of the common drawing common power timer counter.

  If the high frequency support mode is not in the low frequency support mode but the high frequency support mode is in progress in step S2001, the ceiling flag is not set to "1" in step S2003 if the common drawing main change is not being executed. Or, if “1” is set to the ceiling replacement flag in step S2004, the variable display time corresponding to the current support mode is grasped in step S2006. Such processing is similar to the processing relating to the grasp of the fluctuation display time in step S1201.

  After the process of step S2005 or step S2006 is performed, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, the special figure stop result is grasped. This process is the same as the process related to grasping of the stop result in step S1201. In the subsequent step S2008, the remaining variation display time of the main drawing variation detected in step S2005 or the variation display time corresponding to the current support mode grasped in step S2006 is executed to the special view special power timer counter. .

  That is, when the winning on the through gate 35A occurs in a situation where the common drawing sub change is not performed, and the corresponding winning corresponds to the ceiling, the common drawing change start processing (FIG. 31) corresponds to the ceiling. The variable display time is set (steps S1812 and S1813). In this situation, when the game ball corresponding to the ceiling wins the special winning opening 52, the variation display time of the special drawing main variation based on the winning on the special winning opening 52 corresponds to the ceiling. It is set to be the remaining fluctuation display time of the common drawing sub fluctuation (common drawing main fluctuation) set to the fluctuation display time.

  On the other hand, when the winning on the through gate 35A occurs in the situation where the drawing normal sub change is being performed and the winning corresponds to the ceiling, the acquisition processing of the holding information on the common drawing side (FIG. 30) Then, the ceiling replacement command is set as the output target so as not to end the common drawing sub variation being executed (step S1713), and in the common drawing variation processing (FIG. 32), the final stop command for common drawing is output target (Step S1906: NO). In this situation, at the timing when the game ball that has achieved the prize corresponding to the ceiling wins the special prize port 52, the main drawing variation may have ended, but at least the second drawing variation has ended. Absent. In this case, the fluctuation display time of the special view main fluctuation is set to be the fluctuation display time corresponding to the support mode. Then, as in the first embodiment, the sound and light control device 300 performs processing to match the end timing of the game run on the symbol display device 42 with the end timing of the special view main fluctuation.

  In the following step S2009, it is determined whether the low frequency support mode is in progress. If the low frequency support mode is in progress, it is determined in the subsequent step S2010 whether or not the ceiling replacement flag is set to "1". If “1” is set in the ceiling replacement flag, the ceiling replacement flag is cleared to “0” in the following step S2011.

  When it is not the low frequency support mode but the high frequency support mode in step S2009, or after the process of step S2011 is executed, the variation command and type command are output targets to the sound light control apparatus 300 in step S2012. Set

  Even in the low frequency support mode in step S2010, if “1” is not set in the ceiling replacement flag, or after the process of step S2012 is executed, the variable display of the special view display unit 38 is displayed in step S2013. The process is started, and in the subsequent step S2014, 1 is added to the numerical information of the special drawing special power counter, and the present acquisition information setting process is ended. The processes of steps S2013 and S2014 are similar to the processes of steps S1205 and S1206.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the special-model fluctuation command and type command replace the effect of the common drawing sub-variation being executed in the low frequency support mode (the ceiling replacement flag is set to “1” Is transmitted to the sound light control device 300 only when the

  That is, when the general drawing sub change is not performed at the timing when the winning on the through gate 35A corresponding to the ceiling occurs in the low frequency support mode, the change command for special drawing change and the type command are not output . Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the determination of success or failure based on the winning on the special winning opening 52 is out, the game times corresponding to the ceiling based on the winning on the through gate 35A in such a situation, That is, the jackpot effect is performed.

  This is because the winning probability on the side of the special image is approximately 100%, and the processing load can be reduced in this way. However, for example, when changing the winning probability on the special view side, it is preferable to replace the effect based on the result of the special drawing on the ceiling at the lottery result.

<Effect determination process executed by the sound light control device 300>
Next, the effect determination processing by the MPU 302 of the sound and light control apparatus 300 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The process of FIG. 34 is a process to be executed replacing the process of FIG.

  First, in step S 2101, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation command and type command at the time of general drawing fluctuation are received. If these commands have been received, it is determined in the subsequent step S2102 whether or not the low frequency support mode is in progress, and in steps S2103 to S2107, similar to step S1403 to step S1407, the common drawing sub variation Execute processing to start the In this process, a rendering pattern (a rendering pattern corresponding to a jackpot result) in which the winning on the through gate 35A corresponds to the ceiling is determined in a situation where the common drawing sub change is not performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2101 or step S2106, or after the processing in step S2105 or step S2107 is performed, it is determined in step S2108 whether a ceiling replacement command has been received.

  If the ceiling replacement command has been received, it is determined in the following step S2109 whether or not the moving map sub variation being executed corresponds to the support winning, and if it does not correspond to the step S2110. Execute the effect replacement process. In this processing, processing for replacing the content of the general drawing sub-variation effect determined and started in the processing of steps S2103 to S2105 with the effect corresponding to the jackpot result is executed as the effect corresponding to the ceiling.

  Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 35, it is determined in step S2201 whether or not the upper symbol row Z1 is in high speed fluctuation. The case where the upper symbol row Z1 is in high speed fluctuation means that none of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have been stopped yet, and in this case, the effect replacement process is performed after the end restriction processing is performed in the subsequent step S2202. End the process. The termination restriction process of step S2202 is a process of maintaining all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a state of high speed fluctuation without advancing the effect with the effect pattern determined in step SS2103 to step S2105.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2201, it is determined in step S2203 whether or not the lower figure design row Z3 is in high speed fluctuation. If the negative determination is made in step S2201 and the pattern row Z3 is moving at high speed in step S2202, this means that only the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped or moving at low speed, and in this case, step S2204 Then, the re-variation processing of the upper symbol row Z1 is executed, and after the end restriction processing of step S2202 is executed, the present effect replacement processing is ended. The process for re-variation of the upper symbol row Z1 is the same as the processing regarding the upper symbol row Z1 in step S1604.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2203, it is determined in step S2205 whether or not the middle symbol row Z2 is in high speed fluctuation. The high speed change in step S2205 means that the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped or the lower pattern row Z3 is in the low speed change, and in this case, the upper and lower in step S2206 After the re-variation processing of the symbol rows Z1 and Z3 is executed and the end restriction processing of step S2202 is executed, the present effect replacement processing is ended. The process of step S2206 is similar to the process of step S1604.

  If the middle symbol row Z2 is not in high-speed variation in step S2205, the re-variation processing of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is executed in step S2207, and the end restriction processing of step S2202 is executed, and then this is performed. The effect replacement process ends. The process of step S2207 is similar to the process of step S1606.

  That is, by receiving the ceiling replacement command, processing is performed to return all of the fluctuations of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the currently executed common drawing sub-variation to the state of high-speed fluctuation, and the state of the high-speed fluctuation is Maintained. The state during high speed fluctuation is canceled based on the reception of the fluctuation command for special pattern fluctuation and the classification command based on the winning of the special winning opening 52 thereafter.

  Returning to the description of the effect determination process (FIG. 34), if the ceiling replacement command is not received in step S2108, the common drawing sub variation being executed in step S2109 corresponds to the support winning, or After the process of S2110 is performed, the process proceeds to step S2111. In step S2111, it is determined whether or not the variation command for special figure fluctuation and the type command have been received. If these commands have been received, it is determined in the subsequent step S2112 whether the low frequency support mode is in progress.

  If it is in the low frequency support mode in step S2112, then in the following step S2113, the general drawing sub-variation during high-speed fluctuation is changed based on each command in special-character fluctuation based on each command at special-image fluctuation. Execute replacement process. Specifically, the subsequent effects of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during high speed fluctuation are determined by the effect pattern table (FIG. 26B) for the special figure sub fluctuation and the respective commands received this time. In this case, even if any effect pattern is selected in steps S2103 to S2105, the effect replacement process (step S2110) is in the state of high-speed fluctuation, so it is determined in step S2113. The effect pattern is determined regardless of the effect pattern and the stop symbol determined in steps S2103 to S2105.

  After the process of step S2113 is performed, the process of changing the display time of fluctuation of the general drawing sub-variation currently being executed is performed in step S2114. In this process, the numerical information of the progress counter is confirmed, and if it is 0, that is, although the fluctuation display time of the general drawing sub fluctuation inputted in step S2101 has already elapsed, the process of step S2110 is in high speed fluctuation. If the state is maintained, processing is performed to add the numerical information of the fluctuation display time included in the fluctuation command received this time to the elapsed counter. If the numerical information of the progress counter is not 0, that is, if the fluctuation display time of the general drawing sub fluctuation input in step S2101 is not yet elapsed, as in step S1504 of FIG. Execute processing to add the numerical information corresponding to the time (period) obtained by subtracting the remaining fluctuation display time of the general drawing sub fluctuation from the fluctuation display time of the special drawing sub fluctuation to the numerical information of the current progress counter .

  On the other hand, when it is not the low frequency support mode but the high frequency support mode at step S2112, the process of step S2115 to step S2118 is executed similarly to the process of steps S1416 to S1419.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2111 or step S2117, or if a positive determination is made in step S2116, or after the process of step S2114 or step S2118 has been performed, other processes are performed in step S2119, and then the main effect is determined. End the process. The process of step S2119 is similar to the process of step S1420.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the relationship between the winning on the through gate 35A (general drawing winning), the winning on the special winning opening 52 (special drawing winning), and the variable display based on these winnings in the present embodiment. explain.

  If winning on the through gate 35A that occurs at the timing of t1, which is a situation where success or failure judgment on the common drawing side is not performed, corresponds to the ceiling, in the common drawing main fluctuation and the common drawing sub fluctuation, The corresponding variation display time (TB1) and the stop result are determined. After that, when the special winning hole 52 wins at the timing of t2, the remaining fluctuation display time (TB2) of the common drawing main fluctuation started at the timing t1 becomes the fluctuation display time of the special drawing main fluctuation of this time (TB2) It is set as TB3). As a result, the special figure main variation ends at the timing of t3 which is the timing when the common figure main variation and the common figure sub variation end.

  Here, if the value of the first common drawing prize counter reaches the ceiling value during execution of the common drawing sub fluctuation due to the previous common drawing prize, since the common drawing sub fluctuation before reaching the ceiling is started In addition, there is a risk that the common drawing sub-variation associated with reaching the ceiling is not started, and the common drawing sub-variation before reaching the ceiling may end before the special drawing prize. In that respect, as described above, the ceiling replacement flag is set to “1” (step S1712), so that the end of the general drawing sub-variation before reaching the ceiling is limited (step S1906: YES). It is possible to replace the common drawing sub fluctuation before reaching to the effect corresponding to the ceiling.

  That is, when the winning on the through gate 35A generated at the timing of t5 corresponds to the ceiling during the fluctuation of the main drawing variation caused by the common drawing prize generated at t4, the timing at the time t5 Although acquisition of the hold information is not performed depending on the passage to the through gate 35A, an effect corresponding to the ceiling is performed in the common drawing sub-variation started at the timing of t4. In this case, first, at time t5, the ceiling replacement flag is set to “1”, and processing for controlling so as not to end the general drawing sub variation thereafter is performed. Then, with the winning of the special winning opening 52 occurring at the timing of t7 thereafter, the final stop time (TB5) of the spread map sub variation started at the timing of t4 is determined. In addition, as a result, although the normal drawing main variation ends at the timing of t6, the common drawing sub variation does not end (replaced with the special drawing sub variation), and the special drawing main variation ends at the timing of t8. The effect of (the replaced special figure sub fluctuation) ends.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

  In special role product 33, when the game ball which has passed through gate 35A reaches a predetermined number of times, that is, when it reaches the ceiling and wins in special winning opening 52, it starts based on having passed through gate 35A It is configured to start the effect of the game cycle to be played as the effect of the game cycle corresponding to winning to the special winning opening 52. More specifically, when the ceiling flag is set in step S1810 in the common drawing change start process (FIG. 31), the fluctuation display time for the ceiling is grasped in step S1812, and the common drawing sub change is It was configured to start. Normally, in the case of the common drawing sub change, the presence or absence of the reach display is determined independently of the value of the first common drawing prize counter, but when the reach display does not occur in the common drawing sub change corresponding to the ceiling. When it is determined, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower row symbol row Z3 may be stopped and displayed without the reach line being already formed at the winning timing to the special winning opening 52 as in the first embodiment. It can occur. So, in this embodiment, it is set so that reach display may be generated in the common drawing sub change corresponding to a ceiling, and it is considered as composition which replaces stop symbols of middle symbol row Z2 under change. By doing this, it becomes possible to smoothly carry out replacement of the game times corresponding to the ceiling, and it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player. However, in the case of this configuration, it is necessary to perform processing for grasping whether or not the ceiling corresponds to only once every 256 times at the start of the common drawing sub fluctuation, so the processing load on the common drawing sub fluctuation side From the point of view of reducing the above, the first embodiment is preferable.

  The following concerns may arise even with the configuration in which the common drawing sub-variation corresponding to the ceiling is set as described above. That is, while the first common prize winning counter is configured to be counted each time passage of the through gate 35A occurs regardless of the number of times the common drawing sub variation is executed, the common drawing sub variation not corresponding to the ceiling is being executed. In addition, the passage of the through gate 35A corresponding to the ceiling may occur. In such a case, it is also conceivable to finish running the common drawing sub-variation and then start the common drawing sub-variation corresponding to the ceiling. There will be a gap in the start timing of the sub-variation. As a result, it is recognized that the player has reached the ceiling at the time the spread figure sub change is started without further entering the special character 33 after the completion of the spread figure sub movement being executed. It will end up. If this is done, it will lead to a decrease in the attention level of the common figure sub fluctuation. Therefore, in such a case, the general drawing sub-variation is replaced with the one corresponding to the ceiling without ending the common drawing sub-variation being executed. Thereby, the ceiling function using the special character 33 can be suitably realized without causing a decrease in the degree of attention to the common drawing sub variation.

  As described above, taking advantage of the fact that the fluctuation display time of the common drawing sub-variation corresponding to the ceiling is set to a long time, the special drawing-side fluctuation (special drawing sub-variation and The fluctuation display time of the special drawing main fluctuation) is determined as the remaining fluctuation display time of the common drawing main fluctuation at the timing when the special winning opening 52 is won. As a result, in the common drawing sub-variation corresponding to the ceiling, it is only necessary to replace only the symbols in the variation without having to change the variation display time, and it is possible to reduce the processing load at the time of replacement. Become. And by setting it as this composition, the gap of the end timing of change display (general drawing sub change and special drawing sub change) side in the symbol display device 42 side in game turn corresponding to a ceiling, and the transition timing to open / close execution mode occurs. Not only that, the fluctuation display on the common drawing display unit 39 (common fluctuation main fluctuation), the fluctuation display on the special drawing display units 38a and 38b side (special drawing main fluctuation), and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 42 ( It is possible to synchronize the end timing of any variable display of (general drawing sub fluctuation and special drawing sub fluctuation), and it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player.

Third Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the reserved number on the common drawing side is different from the first and second embodiments. The different configurations will be described below.

  First, the common view reservation area 206 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  The common drawing reservation area 206 includes a first area 206a, a second area 206b, a third area 206c and a fourth area 206d, and the common charge random number counter C4, according to the winning history on the through gates 35A and 35B. The numerical value information of the second reach random number counter C5 and the second variation type counter CS2 is stored in any of the areas 206a to 206d as holding information on the general drawing side.

  In this case, if winnings on the through gates 35A and 35B occur a plurality of times consecutively in the first area 206a to the fourth area 206d, the first area 206a → the second area 206b → the third area 206c → the fourth area Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the four areas 206d. As described above, by providing the four areas 206a to 206d, the winning history of the game balls to the through gates 35A and 35B is reserved and stored up to four at maximum.

  The number that can be reserved and stored in the common drawing reservation area 206 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be another plural number such as two, three or five or more.

  Further, in the common drawing reservation area 206, a common drawing execution area 207 is provided as in the first and second embodiments. The execution area 207 for common drawing is an area in which the holding information of the target to be subjected to the support judgment is stored when the variable display on the common drawing display unit 39 is started. Specifically, when the variable display of the common drawing display unit 39 is started, the hold information stored in the first area 206 a of the common drawing reservation area 206 is moved to the execution area 207.

  Although the detailed description by the drawings is omitted, the general drawing hold corresponding to the through gates 35A and 35B in the game board 24 in an area visible to the player (specifically, a position adjacent to the common drawing display unit 39). A display unit is provided. The common drawing reservation display unit is configured of, for example, an LED, and the number of holdings when the game ball wins through the through gates 35A and 35B is displayed by lighting of the common drawing reservation display unit. Specifically, in the case where the number of reservations is four, four general drawing suspension display sections are lit, and in the case where the number of reservations is zero, zero general drawing suspension display sections are lit. . In the case where the holdable number in the common drawing reservation area 206 is changed as described above, the number of common drawing hold display units may be changed.

<Process for obtaining hold information on the side of the common map>
Next, the acquisition processing of suspension information on the common drawing side in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The process of FIG. 38 is a process that is executed replacing the process of FIG.

  In the present embodiment, first, the process of step S2301 to step S2305 is executed as in the process of step S401 to step S405 (step S1701 to step S1705).

  In step S2306, it is determined whether the total number NS of general drawing side holding information stored in the general drawing holding area 206 is less than the upper limit of four. If the total number NS of the holding information on the general drawing side is less than 4, one is added to the total number NS of the holding information on the general drawing side in step S2307. In the subsequent step S2308, the numerical value information of the common charge random number counter C4, the second reach random number counter C5, and the second variation type counter CS2 is stored in the common drawing reservation area 206.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2306, or after the process of step S2308 has been performed, a process related to a ceiling preview is performed in steps S2309 and S2310. Such processing is the same as the processing of the above steps S408 and S409 (steps S1708 and S1709).

  In the following step S2311, the first common drawing prize counter is confirmed, it is determined whether it is numerical information (256) corresponding to the ceiling, and if it is not the numerical information corresponding to the ceiling, this acquisition processing is performed as it is finish. If it is numerical information corresponding to the ceiling, the process proceeds to step S2312.

  In step S2312, it is determined whether the total number NS of the suspension information on the general drawing side is less than 4, which is the upper limit number, and if less than 4, each numerical value is selected in step S2308 in step S2313. Store ceiling information in the area where information is stored. On the other hand, when the total number NS of the suspension information on the common drawing side is 4, which is the upper limit number, ceiling information is stored in the fourth area 206d in step S2314.

  After the process of step S2313 or step S2314 is executed, the first common drawing prize counter is cleared in step S2315, and the present acquisition process is ended.

<General map fluctuation start process>
Next, common drawing fluctuation start processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 39 (a). The process of FIG. 39 (a) is a process that is executed replacing the process of FIG.

  The common drawing change start process in the present embodiment is a processing configuration substantially similar to the common drawing change start process in the second embodiment. Specifically, first, the processes of steps S2401 to S2404 are performed as in the processes of steps S1801 to S1804.

  In step S2405, it is determined whether the total number NS of the suspension information on the general drawing side is 1 or more. If it is 1 or more, data setting processing is executed in the subsequent step S2406.

  In the data setting process, the total number NS of the holding information on the general drawing side is decremented by one, and the data stored in the first area 206 a of the general drawing holding area 206 (that is, holding information) is moved to the execution area 207. Thereafter, shift processing of the general drawing reservation area 206 is performed. In the shift process, the hold information stored in the first area 206a of the common drawing reserve area 206 is cleared, and the second area 206b → the first area 206a, the third area 206c → the second area 206b, the fourth area The hold information in each area is shifted in a manner such as 206 d → third area 206 c. In these processes, the ceiling information stored in step S2313 or step S2314 is also shifted in the same manner as the hold information.

  The processes of steps S2407 to S2418 are the same as the processes of steps S1806 to S1817 in the second embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, it is determined in step S 2411 whether ceiling information is included in the information moved to the execution area 207 for common drawing, not the ceiling flag, to start this time for common drawing. Check if the variation corresponds to the ceiling.

  In addition, also in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39 (b), the floating-use variation display time table at the ceiling is a single change display time.

<Acquisition information setting process>
Next, acquisition information setting processing on the special view side in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The process of FIG. 40 is a process executed in place of the process of FIG.

  First, in step S2501, the high frequency flag is checked to determine whether the low frequency support mode is set. In the following step S2502, it is determined whether or not the common drawing main fluctuation is being executed by confirming whether or not the common drawing common counter is "0". If the common drawing common electricity counter is not “0” but is executing the common drawing main fluctuation, it is determined in the subsequent step S2503 whether the ceiling information is stored in the execution area 207 or not. It is determined whether or not the effect corresponding to the ceiling should be performed in the common drawing sub variation being executed. If there is ceiling information in the execution area 207, in step S2504, the remaining fluctuation display time of the common drawing main fluctuation being executed is grasped. Such a process is the same as the process of step S2005 in FIG.

  If there is no ceiling information in the execution area 207 in step S2503, it is determined in step S2505 whether ceiling information is stored in any of the areas 206a to 206d in the general drawing reservation area 206. When ceiling information is stored in any of the areas 206a to 206d, the variation display time of the hold information of each area from the first area 206a to the area where the ceiling information is stored is grasped in the subsequent step S2506 Do. In this process, it is possible to grasp the information of the fluctuation display time of each area using the numerical information of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 of each area and the fluctuation display time table for common use in the low frequency support mode. In the subsequent step S2507, as in step S2504, the remaining fluctuation display time of the common drawing main fluctuation being executed is grasped.

  If it is not the low frequency support mode but the high frequency support mode at step S 2501, if the main drawing variation is not being executed at step S 2502, or any area 206 a to 206 d of the general drawing reservation area 206 at step S 2505 If the ceiling information is not stored, the variable display time corresponding to the support mode is grasped in step S2508.

  After executing any of the processes in steps S2504, S2507, and S2508, in step S2509, the special figure stop result is grasped. In the subsequent step S2510, processing for setting the variation display time grasped in step S2504, step S2506 and step S2507, or step S2508 in the special figure special power timer counter is executed. That is, in step S 2510, the remaining fluctuation display time of the general drawing main fluctuation grasped in step S 2504 or the fluctuation display time of each of the areas 206 a to 206 d grasped in step S 2506 and the general drawing main fluctuation grasped in step S 2507 The special display special power timer counter is set to either the sum of the remaining variable display time and the variable display time corresponding to the support mode found in step S2508.

  In the following step S2511, it is determined whether or not the low frequency support mode is selected, and if it is not the low frequency support mode but the high frequency support mode, the variation command and type command are output in step S2512. Set as output target to If it is in the low frequency support mode in step S 2511, or after the process of step S 2512 is executed, variable display (special figure main fluctuation) of special figure display unit 38 is started in step S 2513, and in step S 2514 After 1 is added to the figure special power counter, the acquisition information setting process is ended.

  That is, in the present embodiment, during the low frequency support mode, the variation command and type command at the time of special figure variation are not output. This configuration is the same as the processing at the time of the ceiling except in the situation where the ceiling replacement command is output in the second embodiment. That is, also in the present embodiment, in the effect on the side of the symbol display device 42 corresponding to the ceiling, effects (effect for the jackpot result) corresponding to the ceiling are performed regardless of the result of the acceptance determination on the special view side.

<Effect determination process executed by the sound light control device 300>
Next, the effect determination process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The process of FIG. 41 is a process to be executed in place of the process of FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the processes of steps S2601 to S2607 are performed as in the case of steps S1401 to S14107.

  In step S2608, it is determined whether or not the variation command for special figure variation and the type command have been received. If these commands have been received, it is determined in step S2609 whether the low frequency support mode is set. If the low frequency support mode is not selected, the same processing as step S 1416 to step S 1419 is performed in step S 2610 to step S 2613.

  If it is not the low frequency support mode but the high frequency support mode in step S2609, and if the positive determination is made in step S2611, or if the negative determination is made in step S2612, or after the process of step S2613 is performed, the process proceeds to step S2614. After the other processing is executed, the present effect determination processing ends.

  According to the present embodiment described above, since the holding information can be stored separately from the common drawing execution area 207 in the common drawing holding area 206, the effect replacement at the ceiling in the second embodiment occurs. Absent. As a result, it is possible to realize smooth progression of the game by making the hold information storable, and to reduce the storage capacity by simplifying the processing configuration.

Fourth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board 24 is different from the first to third embodiments. Further, in the first to third embodiments, the special figure side success or failure judgment is configured to be triggered by the winning of the special winning opening 52 or the winning of the operation opening 34, but this is changed. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the operation opening 34 is not provided, and as a winning opening for winning special prizes 33 other than at the time of the ceiling (in place of the general winning opening 53) a winning opening on the special view side Is provided. That is, the gaming ball entering the special role item 33 wins in any of the special winning opening 52 and the special drawing-side winning opening provided, and the special view-side pass / fail judgment is made. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 224 in the present embodiment will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (a), in the gaming board 224 of the present embodiment, the through gate 35B is not provided in the right side area PE3, and only the through gate 35A in the left side area PE2 is provided. As in the first to third embodiments, the through gate 35A is provided directly above the ball passage opening 33a in the special character 33, and all gaming balls that have won the through gate 35A are special characters 33. Enter the ball.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 (b) and 42 (c), the through gate 35A is provided with a common utility 35d as a guide piece (support piece) consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The common utility 35d is connected to a common drive (not shown) mounted on the back side of the game board 224, and the common 35d is driven by the common drive (not shown). Non-inductive state (in which the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than in the induced state (supporting state or guiding state) in which the gaming ball shown in FIG. It is placed in either the non-supported state or the non-guided state).

  When the common utility product 35d is disposed in a non-inductive state, both guide pieces are erected to be parallel to the ball passage holes penetrating in the longitudinal direction in the through gate 35A, and from right above with respect to the through gate 35A Only the falling game balls can be awarded to the through gate 35A. In addition, when the common utility product 35d is arranged in the induction state, the pivoting tip sides of the two guide pieces are separated from each other, and game balls falling from above obliquely with respect to the through gate 35A can also be won by the through gate 35A. That is, even when the commercial product 35d is placed in the non-inductive state or in the inductive state, although it is possible to win the through gate 35A, it is in the induced state more than in the non-inductive state. The placement of the through gate 35A makes winning easier. In other words, regardless of whether the commercial battery 35d is placed in the non-inductive state or in the inductive state, it is possible to enter the special character 33 although it is possible, but rather than being placed in the non-inductive state In the case of being placed in the induction state as well, it becomes easier for the special character 33 to enter the ball.

  It is to be noted that a state in which winning of the game ball to the through gate 35A (special role product 33) is likely to occur, and a state in which winning is less likely to occur than a state in which the prize is not impossible. As a configuration in which the accessory 35d is switched, switching between a state in which a winning is likely to occur and a state in which a winning is less likely to occur is performed by moving or rotating the general-purpose antenna 35d in the front-rear direction It is good also as composition. Further, the general electric utility 35d may be defective, and switching between a state in which a winning is likely to occur and a state in which a winning is less likely to occur may be performed by displacement of the through gate 35A itself.

  Based on the winning on the through gate 35A, a lottery for a support execution mode is performed in which the general-purpose utility 35d is switched from the non-induction state to the induction state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed in response to a winning on the through gate 35A as a trigger, and variation display of the pattern is performed in the common view display unit 39. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the support winning and the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed and the variable display is ended, the mode is shifted to the support execution mode. In the support execution mode, the commercial item 35d is in an induced state in a predetermined manner. In the present embodiment, the commercial electric utility 34 a is not provided. That is, in the first to third embodiments described above, the general electric utility 34a is provided to perform the prize support to the operation port 34, but in the present embodiment, the prize support for the special role 33 is performed. In order to achieve this, a commercial product 35d is provided.

  The special prize 33 in the present embodiment is provided with a second special prize mouth 253 instead of the general prize mouth 53 in the first to third embodiments, and the gaming ball enters the special prize 33. In the case of passing through the through gate 35A, the special prize port 52 is awarded once every 256 times, and the other prizes are awarded to the second special prize port 253. In the following description, the special winning opening 52 is also referred to as a first special winning opening 52.

  A big hit lottery is performed triggered by the winning of the first special prize port 52 or the second special prize port 253, and the lottery result is a display effect in the special view display portions 38a and 38b of the lottery result display portion 37 and the symbol display device 42. Explicitly through.

  In the first special view display unit 38a, as in the first to third embodiments, the winning display of the first special winning opening 52 is used as a trigger to perform a big hit lottery, and the variation display or predetermined display of the pattern is performed. To be done. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Further, in the second special view display unit 38b, a big hit lottery is performed with the winning of the second special winning opening 253 as a trigger, thereby performing variation display or predetermined display of a pattern. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation port 34 is not provided. That is, it can be said that the second special winning opening 253 is provided instead of the operation opening 34 in the first to third embodiments.

  When the jackpot lottery based on the winnings on the first special prize port 52 and the second special prize port 253 is won, the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode. In the open / close execution mode in the present embodiment, a substantially per-coin mode and a substantially out-of-plane mode are set. In the actual winning mode, the special power prize device 32 is opened, and the special electric potential prize device 32 is operated by operating the firing operation device 28 so as to flow the gaming ball to the right area PE3 where the special power prize device 32 is provided. Mode is possible. For example, in the actual winning mode, the upper limit number of round games is 7 rounds, and the open duration time of each round is set to 29.5 seconds. Although the special power winning device 32 is in the open state, the special power winning device 32 does not generate a winning even if the firing operation device 28 is operated to flow the gaming ball to the right side area PE3 although the special power off mode is open. It is a difficult mode. For example, in the substantially off mode, the upper limit number of round games is one round, and the open duration of the round is set to 0.6 sec.

  Here, the structure for performing the various lottery in this embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIGS. 43-45.

  As shown in FIG. 43, while the number of pending prizes for each winning opening 52, 253 in the present embodiment is one for the number for which the first special winning entry 52 has won, the second special winning entry 253 is won. The number is suspended up to four, which is the upper limit number. That is, the second special view reservation area 204 in the present embodiment includes a first area 204a, a second area 204b, a third area 204c, and a fourth area 204d. Then, at the timing when the winning of the first special winning opening 52 occurs, various counters used for special drawing lottery or the like for special drawing are stored in the first special drawing reservation area 103, and the winning of the second special winning opening 253 The various counters are stored in one of the areas 204 a to 204 d of the second special view reservation area 204 at the timing when the

  In this case, if winnings to the second special winning opening 253 occur in a plurality of consecutive times in the first area 204a to the fourth area 204d, the first area 204a → the second area 204b → the third area 204c → The data is stored in chronological order in the fourth area 204d.

  In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in second special view reserved area 204 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be other plural such as two, three or five or more. The number may be singular as in the first to third embodiments. However, in order to realize the later-described play in the present embodiment, it is preferable that the number be at least smaller than the predetermined number (256) corresponding to the ceiling.

  In addition, as the drawing area in the present embodiment, the drawing area 206 in the third embodiment is adopted as the reservation area on the drawing side, and a maximum of four game ball winning histories to the through gate 35A are held and stored. It is supposed to be Also in the present embodiment, the number that can be reserved and stored in the common drawing reservation area 206 is not limited to four, and is arbitrary, and may be two or more, such as two, three or five or more. It may be singular as in the first and second embodiments. Also, the number may be zero as in the first and second embodiments. Furthermore, the second special drawing reservation area 204 and the common drawing reservation area 206 do not have to be the same number, but may be different numbers.

  Next, the configuration relating to the acceptance lottery in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (a), as in the first to third embodiments, the common table for special drawing is set in common, and the gaming ball is set to the first special winning opening 52 or the second A winning lottery is performed based on the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599) acquired at the timing when the special winning opening 253 is won. Then, as the success or failure result, the jackpot result and the outlier result are set, and the number of random numbers to be the jackpot result is set to 599. That is, in the present embodiment as well, the probability of becoming a jackpot result by referring to the special drawing use failure table is 599/600, which is about 100% jackpot result.

  As a distribution table of the type of jackpot result when it is a jackpot result, the distribution table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 44 (b) and the shaking table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 43 (c) The minute table is set. The distribution table for the first special drawing is a table to be referred to when the jackpot result is obtained based on the winning of the first special winning opening 52. Further, the second special view distribution table is a table to be referred to when the jackpot result is obtained based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253. Then, in each distribution table, the real per result A and the real per result B for transitioning to the opening / closing execution mode of the above-mentioned per real mode, and the actual deviation result for transitioning to the opening / closing execution mode of the substantial out mode are set. There is. In the present embodiment, a jackpot type counter C6 is set as a distribution counter in the jackpot result. The jackpot type counter C6 is a loop counter similar to the other lottery counters (value = 0 to 119).

  The support mode set after the switching execution mode is different between the per-actual-per-result A and the per-real-per-result B. Specifically, also in the present embodiment, as the support mode, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are provided such that the frequency at which the general power utility 35d is in the induction state per unit time is relatively high and low. It is set.

  When the above distribution result is the result A, the support mode after the corresponding open / close execution mode is ended is set to the high frequency support mode regardless of the type of the support mode before that. The high frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the termination reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the transition. When the distribution result is the result B, the support mode after the corresponding open / close execution mode is ended is set to the low frequency support mode regardless of the type of the previous support mode.

  When the distribution result is substantially out of the result, the transition to the support mode after the corresponding open / close execution mode ends is not performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the transition of the support mode is after the opening / closing execution mode when the result per real result A or the result per real result B and the number of games reach the end reference number after the transition to the high frequency support mode And to be done.

  Also in the present embodiment, the support lottery whether or not the general-purpose utility 35d is controlled to the induction state is performed using the general-purpose random number counter C4. And in this embodiment, the winning probability of a support lottery and the induction | guidance | derivation aspect of the common use goods 35d at the time of becoming a support winning differ by the height of support mode.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), in the common drawing propriety table referenced in the low frequency support mode, short time results and out results are set as success results. When the lottery result is a short-term result, the general-purpose utility 35d is in the induction state once, and the continuation time of the induction state is set to 0.3 sec. Therefore, the duration of the induction state is shorter than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball, and even if the support is won, the through gate 35A will not be hit, or even if it is hit, at most one win. It is set to become. Among the values of "0 to 719", "0 to 35" corresponds to the short-term result, and "36 to 719" corresponds to the out-of-round value of the common charge random number counter C4.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), in the common drawing propriety table which is referred to in the high frequency support mode, the result for a long time and the result for a long time are set as the result of propriety. When the lottery result is a result for a long time, the common utility product 35d is in the induction state three times, and the continuation time of the induction state is set to 3 seconds. Therefore, since the continuation time of the induction state is longer than the firing cycle of the gaming ball and the induction state is made a plurality of times (three times), a plurality of winnings can be generated on the through gate 35A by becoming the support winning. Among "0 to 719", "0 to 575" corresponds to the result for a long time, and "576 to 719" corresponds to the outlier. That is, the probability of winning the support is set higher in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode.

  In detail, in the distribution table for the first special view shown in FIG. 44 (b), when the value of the jackpot type counter C6 is “0 to 59”, the result is the per-substance result A. In the case of "60 to 118", the result per substance B is obtained, and in the case of "119", the result is substantially out of shape. On the other hand, in the second special view distribution table shown in FIG. 44C, when the value of the jackpot type counter C6 is “0”, the result is the result A, and when it is “1 to 119”. It will be a result that is substantially off. That is, in the first special view distribution table and the second special view distribution table, the probability that the first special view distribution table is substantially the per-hit result A is set higher, and The probability that the second special drawing distribution table is substantially out of place is set higher.

  As the game characteristics of the present embodiment configured as described above, winning through the through gate 35A results in winning of any one of the first special winning opening 52 and the second special winning opening 253. Transition to the almost 100% open / close execution mode based on the winnings of. And, in the first special winning opening 52 and the second special winning opening 253, although the probability of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode of the per-substantial mode is set higher when winning in the first special winning opening 52, the special winning combination By the ceiling function 33, the first special winning opening 52 wins a predetermined number of times (256 times) only once, and the occurrence frequency of the opening / closing execution mode in the per-substantial mode is limited.

  That is, normally (except at the time of the ceiling) will win a prize to the second special prize port 253, based on the prize for this second special prize port 253, if it is distributed to the actual winning result A or the actual winning result B The only transition to the open / close execution mode of the real per mode can be obtained prize balls. In addition, even if the second special winning combination 253 continues to be distributed as a result due to winning, the first special winning combination 52 to win the first special winning opening 52 is a high probability of opening and closing execution mode substantially Transition to mode By thus using the ceiling function of the special character 33 and the difference between the lottery modes of the plurality of winning openings 52 and 253 provided on the special character 33, the player is motivated to continue the game. Can be used to improve interest.

  Furthermore, as described above, in the case of the high frequency support mode, the winning frequency to the through gate 35A, that is, the frequency of entering the special role product 33 becomes high. In this case, although the upper limit reserve number based on the winning to the second special winning opening 253 is four, it is expected to enter the game balls more than the upper limit reserve number due to the timing of digesting the game round. As a result, it becomes possible to reach the ceiling earlier than the number of times of game execution (make a prize to the first special winning opening 52).

<Process for obtaining hold information on the side of the common map>
Next, the acquisition processing of the holding information on the common drawing side in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The process of FIG. 46 is a process that is executed replacing the process of FIG.

  In the present embodiment, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether "1" is set in the first common drawing prize flag. As described above, in the present embodiment, the through gate 35B is not provided. Therefore, when "1" is not set in the first flat figure winning flag, the main acquisition process is ended as it is. In step S2702, the first common drawing prize flag is cleared, and in the subsequent step S2703, processing is performed to add 1 to the common drawing prize counter.

  In the following step S2704, it is determined whether or not the total number NS of the holding information on the side of the drawing is less than four. If it is less than 4, the process of adding 1 to the total number NS of pending information on the computer side and updating is performed in the following step S2705, and in the subsequent step S2706 the numerical information of the general electric random number counter C4 is It is stored in the figure reserve area 206.

  In the subsequent step S2707, a hold display lottery process is executed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the display screen 42 a of the symbol display device 42 is provided with an area for performing the display for suspension. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47, a reserve display area 42b is provided below each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in the display screen 42a, and the reserve display area 42b is a second special view reserve area 204. Divided into four display areas: a first unit hold display area 42c, a second unit hold display area 42d, a third unit hold display area 42e, and a fourth unit hold display area 42f, corresponding to the upper limit .

  Then, when the total number PS of the holding information in both special drawing holding areas 103 and 204 is 4 or 5, an image for holding is displayed in each unit holding display area 42c to 42f, and both special drawing holding areas 103 , 204 when the total number PS of the holding information is 1, the image for holding is displayed only in the first unit holding display area 42c.

  That is, although the maximum number of the total number PS of the holding information stored in both the special view holding areas 103 and 204 is 5, the game ball is at a predetermined frequency (one-half 256) that the total number PS is 5 (In this case, the total number PS2 of the holding information in the second special image holding area 204 is four). Therefore, display is made even if the total number PS of the suspension information of both the special view suspension areas 103 and 204 is 5 although only 4 unit suspension display areas are provided in the suspension display area 42b. The number of images for holding is four. Further, the image for holding is not started to be displayed on the occasion of winning on both special winning openings 52, 253, but is started on the occasion of winning on the through gate 35A. As a result, the upper limit of the suspension information to be reserved and stored on the basis of entering the special combination 33 is four on the surface, and the player can be made to think of the special combination 33 as one winning opening.

  Then, the gaming ball actually makes the first special which of the first special winning opening 52 and the second special winning opening 253 the winning occurs using the numerical information of the first common figure winning counter It is configured to be specified before winning in the winning opening 52 or the second special winning opening 253, and to display a corresponding image for suspension. As the image for suspension, the first suspension image P1 is displayed when it corresponds to the winning of the first special winning opening 52, and the second suspension when it corresponds to the winning of the second special winning opening 253. The for-use image P2 is displayed. The two reserve images P1 and P2 can be distinguished in color and shape in which special winning opening 52, 253 they correspond to winning (in the figure, the direction of the hatch is made different). That is, in the present embodiment, the first holding image P1 is displayed in the holding display area 42b, so that the player can recognize that the game times corresponding to the holding information correspond to the ceiling. It has become. That is, the display of the first suspension image P1 corresponds to the ceiling notification effect in the present embodiment.

  Further, a special storage image P3 of a color or shape different from that of the two storage images P1 and P2 (in the figure, the hatch pitch is displayed differently) is set in the storage image, and step S2707 In the on-hold display lottery process, the on-hold image P1 to P3 including the special on-hold image P3 is determined by lottery. In this process, the hold display table provided in the ROM 83 is acquired, and the hold image is determined from the numerical information of the first common figure winning counter.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (b), when the numerical value information of the first popular figure winning counter is "0 to 255" which does not correspond to the ceiling, the first holding image P1 is not selected, and the first holding image P1 is not selected. The 1 storage image P1 is selected only in the case of "255" corresponding to the ceiling. Further, as the numerical information of the first common prize winning counter is closer to “255” corresponding to the ceiling, the special storage image P3 is more easily selected. That is, while the ceiling can be specified by displaying the first storage image P1 as described above, it is possible to enter the ceiling until the ceiling is reached, depending on the frequency at which the special storage image P3 is displayed. It is possible to recognize the number of balls to some extent. Therefore, it can be said that the display of the image P3 for special reservation in the present embodiment corresponds to the ceiling advance notice in the first to third embodiments.

  Thereby, for example, when the image P3 for special storage frequently appears, the motivation to continue the game can be heightened, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Also, by using the through gate 35A instead of each special winning opening 52, 253 as the display trigger of the image for suspension, the timing of entering the special role 33 and the winning timing of each special winning opening 52, 253 It is possible to reduce the discomfort due to the deviation.

  In step S2707, it is determined whether or not variable display is performed by the symbol display device 42. If the variable display is not performed, the above-described hold display lottery process is not performed. Whether or not variable display is being performed by the symbol display device 42 can be determined by checking a temporary change flag set in the RAM 84 and a special figure special charge counter when outputting a temporary change command to be described later. . The temporary change command is a command that is output to the sound and light control device 300 when a winning on the through gate 35A occurs in a situation where the special drawing main change is not performed, and the temporary change flag is “1” in the output. Is set. Then, the temporary change flag is deleted when the first special winning opening 52 or the second special winning opening 253 has a winning. In step S2707, when the temporary change flag is not set and the value of the special view special charge counter is 0 (the special view main change is not performed), the hold display lottery process is not performed.

  After the process of step S2707 is executed, the hold command is set as an output target to the sound light control apparatus 300 in step S2708. The hold command includes information on the type of the hold image determined in step S2707. Further, in the case where the hold display lottery process is not performed on the assumption that the winning on the through gate 35A occurs in the state where the variable display by the symbol display device 42 is not performed in the step S2707, the hold command is not set. . The processing on the sound light control apparatus 300 side when the hold command is received will be described in detail later.

  If it is determined in step S2704 that the number NS of pending information on the general drawing side is not less than 4 (NS = 4), the process advances to step S2709. In step S2709, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode is set by checking the high frequency flag. If it is the high frequency support mode, it is determined in step S 2710 whether or not the number PS2 of holding information in the second special view holding area 204 is four. If it is 4, the processing for adding 1 to the ceiling shortening counter provided in the RAM 84 is executed in the subsequent step S2711. The ceiling shortening counter is a counter for the MPU 82 to specify the number of times of entering the special character 33 in a situation where the number PS2 of the holding information in the second special view holding area 204 is 4 as the upper limit number. .

  In the following step S2712, it is determined whether the numerical information of the ceiling shortening counter is "156". If it is "156", a limit notification command is set as an output target to the sound and light control apparatus 300 in step S2713.

  As described above, when entering the special role 33 occurs in the situation where the number of pending information based on the winning on the second special prize port 253 is the upper limit number (PS2 = 4), distribution within the special role 33 As the plate 54 is rotated, only the actual count to the ceiling by the first common figure winning counter proceeds. By advancing only the actual count, it is possible to reach the ceiling earlier than the actual number of times of game execution (make the first special winning opening 52 win).

  On the other hand, in the first special view distribution table and the second special view distribution table, the main special result that is set in the low frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode in the second special view distribution table Since B is not set, in the high-frequency support mode with a reduced number of holding balls, the second special prize port 253 is selected rather than the benefit obtained by the hit lottery (ceiling) based on the first special prize port 52. It can be said that a player can benefit from the benefits obtained by a winning lottery based on winnings.

  From such a playability, as a player, in the high frequency support mode, while receiving the determination based on the winning to the second special winning opening 253, while the high frequency support mode ends immediately after the end of the ceiling It is preferable that the first special winning opening 52 be judged on the basis of the winning determination). However, as described in the first embodiment, the state of each sorting plate 54 is hard to see or can not be seen from the player, and it is possible to enter how many game balls after entering the special role 33. It is difficult or difficult for the player to grasp whether the special prize port 52 is distributed.

  The numerical value information of the ceiling shortening counter determined in the step S2712 is the maximum number of only the actual count up to the ceiling can be advanced during the high frequency support mode, and the actual count is advanced more than this number. And means it will reach the ceiling during high frequency support mode. Then, the limit notification command set in step S2713 is a command for causing the sound light control apparatus 300 to specify that such a situation is present. The sound light control apparatus 300 that has received the limit notification command controls the speaker unit 65, the display light emitting unit 63, and the like as a limit notification to notify the player that such a situation is present. The processing on the sound light control apparatus 300 will be described in detail later.

  That is, as described above, after the high frequency support mode is finished, the player is subjected to the judgment based on the winning on the second special winning opening 253 as described above in the high frequency support mode by the limit notification. It becomes possible to grasp the situation where it is possible to reach the ceiling immediately or near the end.

  After the process of step S2708 or step S2713 is performed, or when a negative determination is made in any of step S2709, step S2710, and step S2712, the process proceeds to step S2714. In step S2714, it is determined whether the special figure main fluctuation is not performed by determining whether the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is "0". If the special drawing main change is not being performed, a temporary change start command is set as an output target to the sound light control apparatus 300 in step S2715. The temporary change start command is a command for causing the sound and light control device 300 to specify that a winning on the through gate 35A (entering the special role product 33) has occurred in a situation where the special drawing main change is not performed. More specifically, it is a command for starting the effect of the game round before winning the special winning opening 52, 253, triggered by the passage of the through gate 35A. The processing on the sound light control apparatus 300 will be described in detail later. In step S2715, the temporary change flag is set to "1" as described above. As a result, the MPU 82 can grasp that the variable display is being performed on the symbol display device 42 in the situation where the special drawing main change is not performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2714, or after the process of step S2715 has been performed, it is determined in step S2716 whether the numerical information of the first common drawing prize counter is "256" corresponding to the ceiling. If it is not "256", the main acquisition process is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S2716 that the numerical information of the first common drawing winning counter is "256", the first general drawing winning counter is cleared in step S2717 and the ceiling shortening counter is cleared in step S2718. , This acquisition processing ends.

<General map fluctuation start process>
Next, a common drawing change start process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The process of FIG. 48 is a process to be executed in place of the process of FIG.

  In the present embodiment, in the same manner as the processing of steps S2401 to S2410, the process of step S2801 to step S2810 is performed until the acceptance determination processing. In step S2811, the fluctuation display time and stop result in the common drawing display unit 39 are grasped, and the grasped fluctuation display time is set in the common drawing common power timer counter in step S2812, and the common drawing display unit 39 in step S2813. Start the variable display in. Then, in step S2814, 1 is added to the common map common counter, and the common drawing change start process is ended.

  That is, in this embodiment, the variation command for common drawing and the type command are not output to the sound light control apparatus 300 (step S2416), and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 42 side corresponding to the common variation (general drawing sub Fluctuation) is not performed. Then, the variation display on the side of the symbol display device 42 based on the winning on the through gate 35A is only a temporary variation display being started in a state where the special figure main variation is not performed (step S2715).

<Process for acquiring hold information on special drawing side>
Next, the acquisition processing of the suspension information on the special view side in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The process of FIG. 49 is a process executed in place of the process of FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the acquisition process on the first special view side is executed in steps S2901 to S2905 as in the processes of steps S901 to S905. In step S2906, it is determined whether "1" is set in the second special figure prize flag, and if it is set, in step S2907, processing for clearing the flag is executed. In the following step S2908, it is determined whether or not the number PS2 of reservation information on the second special view side is less than the upper limit number 4, and if it is less than 4, the reservation on the second special view side is made in step S2909. A process of updating the number PS2 of information by 1 is performed. In the subsequent step S2910, the various numerical value information of the various counters is stored in the corresponding areas 204a to 204d of the second special view holding area 204. Note that the counter for distribution determination stored in step S2910 is not the support type counter C2 but the big hit type counter C6, and the same applies to the processing of the first special view side in step S2905. If a negative determination is made in step S2906 or step S2908, or after the process of step S2910 is executed, the present acquisition process is ended.

  That is, in the present embodiment, unlike the first to third embodiments, the situation in which the processing associated with the determination of the second special view side is performed (the suspension information is stored in the execution area 105 for the special view) Even in the situation, the processing for storing the hold information in the second special view hold area 204 is executed. Accordingly, in the data setting process (FIG. 22) in the present embodiment, a process (step S1107) for setting "1" to the flag under execution of the second special figure (step S1107) or the flag in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 21) is cleared. The process (step S1012) is not executed (not shown). In addition, in step S1105 of the data setting process in the present embodiment, the number PS2 of the second special view side information is decremented by 1 and updated because the upper limit number of the second special view side pending information is increased. Change to the process to

<Special power termination processing>
Next, special power termination processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The process of FIG. 50 is a process executed in place of the process of FIG.

  First, in step S3101, as in the case of step S1301, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed, and if it has not, the electric power termination process is ended as it is.

  In the following step S3102, it is determined whether or not the game result that has triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is a result that is substantially out of step. Although the detailed description by the drawings is omitted, in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 21) in the present embodiment, the distribution determination process (the game result is changed from the first to third embodiments). Step S1008) A process is executed to set "1" to the flag corresponding to the game result assigned after step S1008. Specifically, if the result per substance A is set "1" to the flag A per substance, if the result per substance B is set "1" to the flag B per substance, if it is a result out of substance Set the out flag to "1". In step S3102, it is possible to determine whether or not the game result that is the trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is the result of the substantial removal by confirming the substantial removal flag.

  If it is determined in step S3102 that the game result is not an out-of-substance result, it is determined in step S3103 whether or not the game result that has triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is a result A. In such processing, the above-mentioned substantial-per-flag is referred to. If the result is A, the process related to the setting of the high frequency support mode is executed in steps S3104 to S3106 as in the processes of steps S1303 to S1305. Further, the case where it is not the actual winning result A in step S3103 means that the gaming result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is the actual winning result B, in this case, in step S3107 to step S3109. Similar to the processing in steps S1306 to S1308, processing relating to setting of the low frequency support mode is executed.

  If it is determined in step S3102 that the result is a substantial deviation result, or after the processing of either step S3106 or step S3109 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3110. The processes of steps S3110 and S3111 are the same as the processes of steps S1309 and S1310 described above. After the process of step S3111 is performed, the present special electric power termination process is ended.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the transition of the support mode is not performed at the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the substantially out mode based on the substantially out result.

<Effect determination process executed by the sound light control device 300>
Next, the effect determination process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The process of FIG. 51 is a process that is executed replacing the process of FIG.

  First, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the hold command is received. If it is received, the hold command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 400 as it is as a hold display process in the subsequent step S3202. In the display control device 400, based on the reception of the hold command, the information on the type of the hold image included in the hold command is read, and the corresponding hold images P1 to P3 are read from the character ROM 406 to hold the hold. A process for displaying the for-use images P1 to P3 in the corresponding unit hold display areas 42c to 42f of the hold display area 42b of the symbol display device 42 is executed. Although the detailed description by the figure is omitted, the image for suspension is the fourth unit suspension display area 42f → the third unit suspension display area 42e, the third unit suspension display area 42e → the second unit suspension at the start of the game production effect The display area 42d, the second unit hold display area 42d, and the first unit hold display area 42c are shifted, and the image of the first unit hold display area 42c is cleared.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3201, or after the process of step S3202 has been performed, it is determined in step S3203 whether a temporary change command has been received. If the temporary change command is received, the temporary change start process is executed in step S3204, and then the temporary change start command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 400 as it is in step S3205. In the temporary variation start process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65 are controlled so as to start an effect for game circulation. Further, the display control device 400 that has received the temporary change start command controls the symbol display device 42 so as to start variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  By the way, in the effect started by receiving these temporary change commands, the effect pattern such as the presence or absence of the reach occurrence after that and the final stop result have not been determined, and the change display of the symbol row Z1 to Z3 or it The accompanying sound light control device 300 only starts the effect. That is, the pattern of the effect for temporary change is predetermined in the sound light control device 300 and the display control device 400. Then, the display control device 400 reads data set in advance from the program ROM 403, and outputs a drawing list to the VDP 405 each time an image update timing predetermined in accordance with the data is reached. Thereby, in the symbol display device 42, a predetermined effect for temporary change is executed.

  Specifically for this temporary change effect, the variable display of symbols is started, and then each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is the effect until the high speed variation is reached, and after each symbol row Z1 to Z3 reaches the high speed variation Is set to maintain its state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3203, or after the process of step S3205 is executed, it is determined in step S3206 whether a limit notification command has been received. If the limit notification command has been received, the limit notification command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 400 as it is as the limit notification process in step S3207. The display control device 400 reads the information of the background data from the character ROM 406 so as to change, for example, the background of the fluctuation display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as the limit notification based on the reception of the limit notification command. The symbol display device 42 is controlled to perform variable display using data.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3206, or after the process of step S3207 is performed, it is determined in step S3208 whether or not the variation command and type command at the time of special figure variation are received. If these commands have been received, it is determined in the following step S3209 based on the processing results of steps S3103 to S3105 whether temporary fluctuations are being executed.

  When the temporary change is not executed, the symbol determination process for determining the stop symbol is executed in step S3110 based on the received command for special pattern change and the type command received, and in step S3211 Execute the process of determining the effect pattern. These processes are similar to the processes of step S1411 and step S1412 described above.

  That is, in step S3210, the combination of the stop symbols is determined in accordance with the game result of the gaming round started this time. Specifically, the combination of stop symbols is determined so that the combination of the same odd symbol is formed on any effective line in the case of the result A, and in the case of the result B. Determine the combination of the stop symbols so that the combination of the same even symbols is formed on the effective line of and stop so that the combination of the same pattern is not formed on any effective line in the case of the result of the substantial deviation Determine the combination of symbols. That is, in the present embodiment, when the combination of the same even symbols is stopped, transition to the open / close execution mode based on the result B per substance is made clear, and then transition to the low frequency support mode is clearly indicated.

  In step S 3211, the effect duration corresponding to the currently received command for variation and type command is obtained by referring to the special-figure-variation effect table stored in advance in the ROM 303 of the sound and light control device 300. While selecting the effect continuation period), the effect pattern is selected. In the sound light control device 300, according to the effect pattern determined in step S3211, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 63 in the current game round accompanying the special figure winning is performed, and the output control of the speaker unit 65 is performed.

  In the subsequent step S3212, a stop result command corresponding to the processing result in step S3210 and a pattern command corresponding to the processing result in step S3211 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 400. In the display control device 400, based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the data table for performing the effect for the present game circulation with the symbol display device 42 is read out from the program ROM 403 in the display control device 400. According to the data table, the drawing list is output to the VDP 405 each time a predetermined image update timing is reached. As a result, in the symbol display device 42, effects for the game circulation are executed according to the effect pattern determined by the sound and light control device 300, and the determined stop result is finally stopped and displayed.

  When temporary change is performed in step S3209, symbol determination processing for replacement is executed in step S3213. This process is the same as the process of step S3110. That is, regardless of the execution of the temporary change, the final stop symbol is determined by the received change command and type command.

  In the subsequent step S3114, a process of determining a replacement effect pattern is executed. This process is substantially the same as the process of step S3111. The difference is that the effects from the start of fluctuation in the fluctuation display of the symbol to the high-speed fluctuation are deleted this time among the effect patterns selected by the fluctuation command and type command and the special effects table at the time of special drawing fluctuation. It is decided as an effect pattern for replacement of.

  In the subsequent step S3115, the stop command for replacement corresponding to the processing result in step S3113 and the pattern command corresponding to the processing result in step S3214 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 400. In the display control device 400, based on the received stop result command and pattern command for replacement, the data table for replacing the effect for temporary change is read out from the program ROM 403 in the display control device 400, and according to the data table The drawing list is output to the VDP 405 each time a predetermined image update timing is reached. As a result, in the symbol display device 42, the effect already started for the game cycle is replaced according to the effect pattern determined by the sound and light control device 300, and the determined stop result is finally stopped and displayed. .

  Next, the relationship between the winning on the through gate 35A (general drawing winning), the winning on each special winning opening 52, 253 (special drawing winning), and the variable display based on these winnings will be described with reference to FIG. 52. Do.

  When a winning on the through gate 35A occurs at the timing of t1, which is a situation where the variable display in the symbol display device 42 is not performed (the temporary change is not performed and the special view special charge counter is 0), While the figure main variation is started, the temporary variation start command is output and the temporary variation (sub variation) in the symbol display device 42 is started in the acquisition processing (FIG. 46) of the stock information on the common drawing side. When the gaming ball that has won the through gate 35A at the timing of t1 wins one of the special winning openings 52, 253 at the timing of t2, the special figure main variation starts, and the sound and light control device 300 makes a temporary variation Is output for replacement (step S3215 in FIG. 51), and replacement of the temporary variation started at the timing of t1 is performed. Then, the common drawing main variation ends at the timing of t3, and the variation display on the symbol display device 42 also ends at the timing when the special figure main variation at t4 ends.

  On the other hand, winning of the through gate 35A occurs at the timing of t5, which is a situation where the variable display in the symbol display device 42 is being performed (the temporary change is being made or the special view special charge counter is not 0). In this case, although the general drawing main change is started, the temporary change command is not output. In addition, the game ball which has won the through gate 35A at the timing of t5 wins one of the special winning openings 52, 253 at the timing of t6. When the special figure main change being executed at the time t5 ends at the time t7, the hold information of the special figure side that has already been acquired (if the temporary change is being made at the time t6, the time t6 If the status of the Tokushu special charge counter is not 0 at the timing of t6, and if the status of the special view special power side is not 0, it is t8 based on the suspension of the special drawing side acquired before the timing of t6). The special view main variation and the variation display on the symbol display device 42 are started from the timing. Then, these variations end at the timing of t10.

  Next, the flow of the game according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the gaming ball wins the through gate 35A and enters the special role item 33, the gaming ball is distributed to the first special winning opening 52 or the second special winning opening 253. In this case, it is normally distributed to the second special winning opening 253, and is distributed to the first special winning opening 52 only when the ceiling is reached.

  When a winning on the second special winning opening 253 occurs, the jackpot result is almost 100%, and the type of jackpot result is distributed based on the distribution table for the second special drawing. In this case, with a probability of 1/120, the result is a per-substance result A, and the remainder is a result that is substantially off. When the result is A, the game is switched to the opening / closing execution mode of the real per mode, and a prize for the special power prize device 32 is permitted (a prize ball can be obtained). When the open / close execution mode ends, the support mode is set to the frequent support mode. This high frequency support mode continues until the number of times of execution of game times reaches the specified ending number of times (100 times). Also, in the high frequency support mode, in order to frequently enter the special role 33 (because it is possible to win the first special prize port 52 or the second special prize port 253 to obtain the prize balls) The game can be continued (expecting the next opening / closing execution mode of the per real mode).

  As described above, although the hold information acquired based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253 is stored only up to four, which is the upper limit number, it is in a situation where the hold information of the upper limit number is stored. Even, the actual counting to the ceiling proceeds. In the high frequency support mode, the winning frequency to the through gate 35A, ie, the pitch frequency to the special character 33, is higher than that in the low frequency support mode, so the above actual count can be easily progressed in the high frequency support mode. It is possible to That is, it is possible to easily win the first special winning opening 52.

  When the ceiling is reached, a winning to the first special winning opening 52 occurs, which also results in nearly 100% jackpot. However, in the first special view distribution table, 1/5 becomes the result A per real and 4/5 becomes the result B real per. When the result is B, the transition to the switching execution mode in the per-substantial mode is made, but when the switching execution mode ends, the support mode is set to the infrequent support mode instead of the high-frequency support mode.

  Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, although it is possible to easily count the actual count as described above, it is substantially based on the winning on the second special winning opening 253 rather than counting until reaching the ceiling. It is preferable for the player to distribute the winning result A.

  Therefore, as a player, in the high frequency support mode, in order to advance the actual count to the extent not to reach the ceiling first, the number PS2 of pending information on the second special view side is the upper limit value 4 A prize is awarded to the through gate 35A (special role product 33). Then, if the jackpot result based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253 is distributed to the actual winning result A in the distribution determination processing (step S1008), the high frequency support mode continues, and the player continues holding The game can be continued without reducing the ball. In this case, the actual count is near the ceiling at the end of the high-frequency support mode even if the high-frequency support mode is not distributed to the result A, but the prize is given to the first special prize port 52 immediately thereafter. It is possible to shift to the opening / closing execution mode of the substantive mode based on that.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first regular drawing prize counter sets the ceiling function of the special role 33 while setting the termination prescribed number of times of the high frequency support mode every time the opening / closing execution mode of the per-main mode is finished. Since they are linked, they are set (cleared to 0) each time they reach the ceiling.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to cause a change in the number of prize balls that can be expected thereafter, depending on the value of the first flat figure winning counter (whether it is far or close to the ceiling) at the time the player starts to hit. it can. Specifically, the closer to the value corresponding to the ceiling, the closer the value of the first common figure winning counter at the time of starting to hit, the sooner it is possible to win the first special winning opening 52. On the other hand, immediately after reaching the ceiling, the value of the first common prize winning counter is the farthest from the ceiling, so from the viewpoint of obtaining the opening / closing execution mode of the substantial winning mode based on the winning on the first special winning opening 52 It may also be undesirable for the player. However, it is based on the special figure prize without reducing the holding ball in the case of shifting to the high frequency support mode based on the prize to the second special prize mouth 253 in a situation where the value of the first common figure prize counter is small. The period for receiving a yes or no lottery (sorting lottery) becomes longer.

  This will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b). FIG. 54 (a) shows an example when hitting is started in a situation where the value of the first common drawing winning counter is "0", and FIG. 54 (b) shows an example when hitting is started in a situation where "200". Is shown.

  Regardless of the situation, a high-income support (for example, a distribution lottery) is made based on the winning of the second special prize port 253, for example, when the tenth winning is distributed to the result A. At the start of the mode, if the first popular figure winning counter starts to hit from "0", the number of balls required to reach the ceiling is "246", which is more than the specified number of terminations in the high frequency support mode. On the other hand, when the first popular figure winning counter starts to hit from "200", the number of balls required to reach the ceiling is "46", which is smaller than the prescribed number of times of termination of the high frequency support mode.

  For example, when the number of balls required to reach the ceiling is "246", then the 86th prize (the first flat figure prize counter is "96") is distributed to the result A, and then the 90th prize. (The 1st prize figure winning counter is "186") and it is distributed to result A per substance, and then, when it reaches the ceiling, result 3 per substance for substance per 1 including the first hit and result B per substance of the ceiling The player can get one at a time. And since the game is played in the high frequency support mode during this time, it is possible to obtain the winning balls in the opening / closing execution mode of the real per four mode without reducing the balls much.

  On the other hand, if, for example, the number of balls required to reach the ceiling is "46", then it will reach the ceiling at the 46th prize, and in any of these 46 prizes, it will be the result A If the player does not distribute the game to the player, the player gets a result of one per-actual-per-first hit and a one-per-per-ceiling result.

  Therefore, during the high-frequency support mode, the possibility of being assigned to the result A substantially based on the winning of the second special prize port 253 (the number of times that the winning lottery and the sorting lottery are received) The transition to the high frequency support mode in a situation where the value of the counter is small is easier to realize, and it is preferable for the player to start hitting from the situation in which the value of the first popular figure winning counter is small. By doing this, the player is expected to actively play the game even if the value of the first common drawing prize counter is small and far from the ceiling, and it is possible to encourage active participation in the game. It becomes.

  In practice, the player can not see the value of the first common figure winning counter, and as described above, the situation of the sorting board 54 of the special role 33 is also difficult to see or unable to see. In addition to the player who is actually playing a game, it is difficult to grasp only those who are checking the game in the vicinity of the player who is playing the game. However, not the actual count to the ceiling, but the number of times of execution of the game play is generally displayed by a data counter or the like installed in the game hall, and even if it is a person other than the above, this data counter It is possible to guess the actual count to the ceiling, etc.

  Also, in such a data counter or the like, not only the actual number of times of game execution, but also the actual count up to the ceiling may be displayed. In this case, the value of the first common prize winning counter may be externally output from the main controller 71 or the like directly to the data counter or indirectly via a hall computer or the like.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

  The gaming ball that has passed through gate 35A normally wins the second special winning opening 253. On the basis of this winning, in the acquisition processing of the suspension information on the special view side (FIG. 49), the suspension information is acquired on condition that the number PS2 of the suspension information on the second special view side is less than the specified number (4). . Then, in the case where the suspension information is the acceptance / rejection determination and the distribution determination processing in the special view change start processing (FIG. 21) (steps S1006 and S1008) and the result is A per substance, opening / closing execution of the per substance mode Transition to mode In such a configuration, the gaming ball that has entered the 256th time by the ceiling function of the special character 33 is distributed to the first special winning opening 52. When a winning on the first special winning opening 52 occurs, the mode is switched to the opening / closing execution mode of the substantially per hit mode with almost 100% probability. As a result, even if the through gate 35A (special role product 33) is allowed to pass through the game ball even in the situation where the second special view side reserved information has reached the specified number, at least the ceiling of the special service feature 33 Since it is possible to advance the actual count, it is possible to urge the player to continue the launch of the game ball.

  As described above, when a winning on the first special winning opening 52 occurs, there may be a transition to the opening / closing execution mode of the per-substantial mode with a probability of approximately 100%, but may not transition with a predetermined probability. Specifically, in the success / failure determination process, the result is out at a probability of 1/600, and even in the case of a jackpot result, the mode is shifted to the switching execution mode of the substantially out mode at a probability of 1/120. As a result, it is possible to suppress the shooting feeling without excessively increasing the ball expansion rate. In addition, in order to enhance the effect of suppressing this feeling of jealousy, it is preferable to increase the probability of the outlier result or the outlier result. In addition, as a method of suppressing the shooting feeling, the benefits obtained in the opening / closing execution mode of the substantial hitting mode may be reduced. Specifically, the number of rounds may be reduced, the number of winning balls based on the winning on the large winning opening 32a may be reduced, or the maximum number of balls entering one round may be reduced.

  When the numerical value information of the first common drawing prize counter reaches the special number (156) before reaching the ceiling (256), the special information has become the special number in the symbol display device 42 by the limit notifying process (step S3207) It was configured to notify that. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to grasp how long it will reach the ceiling later, and it is possible to urge continuation of the game.

  The through gate 35A is provided with a general-purpose utility 35d that can be displaced between the induction state and the non-induction state. Then, it is configured to shift to the high frequency support mode or the low frequency support mode triggered by the termination of the open / close execution mode in the substantive mode. Specifically, after the open / close execution mode based on the result A, the mode is switched to the high frequency support mode with a limited number of times, and after the open / close execution mode based on the result B, the mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode. And in the first special view distribution table, there is a possibility that it is distributed to either of the results A, B per substance, and in the distribution table for the second special figure, there is a possibility that it will be distributed to only the actual result A . In other words, there is a possibility of transitioning to the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode transitioned by the ceiling, and there is no possibility of transitioning to the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode based on winning on the second special prize port 253 .

  In this case, when the player shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in the per-substantial mode based on the winning on the second special winning opening 253, the second high-frequency support mode does not reach the ceiling during the subsequent high-frequency support mode. It is expected to be distributed to the actual winning result A based on the winning on the special winning opening 253. Furthermore, even if this high frequency support mode reaches the specified number of termination times (100 times) (even when transitioning to the low frequency support mode), high frequency support so as to reach the ceiling as soon as possible. Adjust the number of balls in the mode. In addition, when it reaches the ceiling, it is expected that it will be distributed to the result A per substance. In this manner, a new game can be provided by using the ceiling function of the special character 33 and the commercial power 35d provided on the through gate 35A.

  The specified number of terminations of the frequent support mode with a limited number of times is smaller than the number of passes corresponding to the ceiling. If the predetermined number of times of termination is more than the number of passes corresponding to the ceiling, in the high frequency support mode even without passing through gate 35A in the situation where the number of reservations on the second special view side is the upper limit. Will reach the ceiling. In this case, it is not preferable in the above-mentioned game that the actual count is advanced to the vicinity of the ceiling and the ceiling is immediately reached after the high frequency support mode ends. Therefore, the above game can be suitably realized by setting the specified ending number of times as described above.

  If passage to the through gate 35A occurs in a state where the number of reservations on the second special view side is at the upper limit, the ceiling shortening counter is incremented by 1 and the ceiling shortening counter is 156 in the high-frequency support mode. When it becomes, it is set as the structure in which the effect of the limit alerting | reporting is performed by the symbol display apparatus 42. FIG. This enables the player to grasp that the limit value for advancing only the actual count is reached during the high frequency support mode, and helps the game to end the high frequency support mode near the ceiling. Can.

  Generally, in a gaming machine having a ceiling function, a player selects a platform close to a ceiling to play a game, and therefore a platform far from the ceiling, that is, a platform immediately after the ceiling tends to be avoided. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since there is a possibility of shifting to the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode by the ceiling, the actual winning result based on the winning of the second special winning opening 253 during the high frequency support mode. Substantially distributed subdivisions to A are more likely to be acquired substantive subdivisions later when transitioning to the frequent support mode in the low frequency support mode at the stage far from the ceiling. Thereby, it is possible to play a game without being at a standstill, even in the stand immediately after the ceiling, while realizing a relief function for the player, which is the ceiling.

Other Embodiments
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, the following configurations may be applied alone to the configurations of the above embodiments, or may be applied to the configurations of the above embodiments in a predetermined combination.

  (1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the state of each sorting plate 54 may be manually changed from the outside of the special part product 33. Specifically, in the state where the front door frame 14 is pivoted to the front of the game ball, the special role product 33 is configured so that the state of each of the distribution boards 54 can be operated from the back side of the game board 24. For example, the rotary shaft 55 of the sorting plate 54 is protruded to the back side of the game board 24 to be used as an operation portion, and the operating portion of the rotary shaft 55 is turned by hand to forcibly change the state of each sorting plate 54 It can be so. Thus, the combination of the states of the plurality of distribution plates 54 can be easily changed. In addition, the combination of the state of the plurality of distribution boards 54 can be made by rotating the front door frame 14 forward of the gaming ball, so the hole manager can change it, but the player can not change it. It has become. As a result, it is possible to provide a morning setting in which a bonus is given to the player who started the game first in the morning in the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, among the plurality (eight) of the distribution plates 54, a portion of the distribution plates 54 can be fixed so that the distribution destination becomes the first passage 51a (a passage that can be won with the special winning opening 52). It is also good. For example, in the case where the distribution destination is fixed to the first passage side with respect to any five of the eight distribution plates 54 among the eight distribution plates 54 and the remaining three distribution plates 54 are not fixed, a ball When the number of passing game balls at the passage opening 33a becomes "8 (= 2 3rd power)", the game balls will win the special winning opening 52. In this case, it is possible to win a game ball on the special winning opening 52 at a rate of once every eight passes. In other words, the ceiling value can be changed, and the setting mode of the ceiling can be diversified.

  (2) In the special product 33 of each of the above-described embodiments, the plurality of distribution plates 54 are each provided with an electric actuator (drive unit) such as a solenoid, and the distribution destination of each distribution plate 54 is switched by the actuator. It is also good. In this case, each distribution plate 54 may be configured to be driven independently. In this configuration, for any of the distribution plates 54, the destination of the distribution is fixed to the first passage 51a (the passage that can be won with the special winning opening 52) by driving the actuator, or the second passage 51b (special winning opening 52) In the fourth embodiment, the second special winning opening 253 can be fixed on the side where it is impossible to win a prize, and thereby the predetermined number (playing balls are made to win the special winning opening 52). It is possible to change the number of ball passes required for (1) to either increase or decrease.

  For example, in the case where the distribution destination is fixed to the first passage side with respect to any five of the eight distribution plates 54 among the eight distribution plates 54 and the remaining three distribution plates 54 are not fixed, a ball When the number of passing game balls at the passage opening 33a becomes "8 (= 2 3rd power)", the game balls will win the special winning opening 52. In this case, it is possible to win a game ball on the special winning opening 52 at a rate of once every eight passes. In other words, the ceiling value can be changed, and the setting mode of the ceiling can be diversified.

  In addition, the actuator may be made controllable by the control means (for example, the main controller 71). In this case, the control means executes a predetermined distribution control program to determine the distribution destination of each distribution plate 54, and drives the actuator based on the result. As a result, the distribution destination of each distribution board 54 can be arbitrarily switched by control, and game contents (specifications) and game effects can be diversified. For example, it is preferable to change the predetermined number (the number of ball passages required to cause the special winning opening 52 to win the game ball) between the normal state and the high certainty state.

  Further, in the special role product 33, a configuration may be adopted in which the distribution plate 54 that mechanically operates with the flow of the game ball and the distribution plate 54 electrically driven by the electric actuator are provided in combination. .

  (3) In each of the above embodiments, when the value of the first common figure winning counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have won special special product 33 reaches 251 and approaches "256", the symbol display device 42 The ceiling preview is performed, but the mode of notification is not limited to this, and the value of the first common drawing prize counter and the remainder to the ceiling are executed each time the game time based on the common drawing common control processing is executed. The number of times may be notified. In this case, it is preferable that the value of the first ordinary figure winning counter and the number of times remaining to the ceiling are not notified continuously even after the game run is over, but it is preferable to notify only between the game cycle start and the end . As a result, the player can not obtain notification information for the pachinko machine 10 near the ceiling without playing a game, and the player can be encouraged to play the game.

  (4) The configuration may be such that fraudulent notification is performed using the value of the first common drawing prize counter. For example, it is determined whether or not the value of the first plain drawing winning counter is obtained at the time of winning on the special winning opening 52, and the value is “256” which is the number of ceilings. It is considered that a prize has occurred illegally. In this case, a configuration may be considered in which the main control device 71 outputs an unauthorized notification command to the hall computer and the sound light control device 300.

  (5) In the first to third embodiments, the special prize 33 is provided with the special winning opening 52 and the general winning opening 53, and the gaming balls having passed the ball passage opening 33a are those of the respective winning openings 52, 53. It was set as the composition distributed to either, but changing this, the game ball which passes ball passing opening 33a either is special winning a prize opening 52 or out opening 24a (ceiling opening without the payout which accompanies entering the ball) It may be distributed to

  (6) In each of the above embodiments, the special symbol 33 is provided with a cover member 60 that covers each sorting plate 54 from the front of the gaming machine, and this sorting member 54 makes each sorting plate 54 invisible to the player. This may be changed to make each sorting plate 54 visible to the player. In this case, if the respective sorting boards 54 are seen, it is possible to easily predict the future gaming situation, and it is possible to further enhance the gaming intention of the player.

  (7) In the above embodiments, in the main controller 71 (MPU 82), the number of gaming balls having passed through the through gate 35A provided in the left side area PE2, that is, the number of gaming balls having passed through the ball passage opening 33a is The configuration is such that the ceiling notification command is set when it is counted by the common drawing prize counter and the count value reaches a predetermined value (= 251) in front of the ceiling (steps S403, S408, and S409 in FIG. 15). Then, in the sound light control device 300, a ceiling notification command is received, and an effect corresponding to the ceiling notification is performed. The configuration may be changed as follows.

  For example, in the sound light control device 300 which is the sub control device, the number of gaming balls passing through the through gate 35A, that is, the number of gaming balls passing through the ball passage opening 33a is counted, and the count value is a predetermined value in front of the ceiling When it reaches = 251), the effect corresponding to ceiling information is carried out. In this case, the sound and light control device 300 may receive a signal indicating passage of the through gate 35A through the sphere from the main control device 71, and count the number of times of common prize winning on the through gate 35A side accordingly. In this configuration, the main controller 71 does not need to count, and the counting process may be omitted.

  Further, as described above, in the configuration in which the sound passage control number of the through gate 35A is counted in the sound and light control device 300, the sound passage control number of the through gate 35A is large hit number of ceilings (= 256) on the sound and light control device 300 side. We can recognize that we reached. Therefore, when the ball passage number of the through gate 35A reaches the number of ceilings of the big hit (= 256), the sound and light control device 300 executes the effect corresponding to the big hit as the symbol variation of the symbol display device 42 You may In this case, in the sound light control device 300, before the gaming ball wins the special winning opening 52 (that is, a period from the gaming ball winning in the through gate 35A to the special winning opening 52), It is preferable to output a command to the display control device 400 so as to start symbol variation (symbol variation in which a stop symbol is a big hit symbol) corresponding to a big hit.

  (8) While the game turn based on the common view common control process is being executed by the symbol display device 42 (in the case of the common view common turn counter ≠ 0), the game round based on the special view special power control processing is not started It is good also as composition. In this case, in the configuration in which the symbol variation based on the common pattern common control process and the symbol variation based on the special view special power control process are implemented by the same symbol display device 42, the symbol variation due to the common view special power control is incomplete It is possible to suppress being interrupted by

  (9) In the first to third embodiments described above, the game ball that has won the through gate 35A by using the special role product 33 wins the special winning hole 52 at a predetermined ratio, but the special role The game ball passing through the through gate 35A without using the object 33 may win the special winning opening 52 at a predetermined ratio. For example, in addition to the ball entering part (for example, special winning opening 52) where the winning lottery in opening / closing execution mode and the effect of game round in symbol display device 42 are performed in game board 24, a passing part (for example, game balls can pass) A through gate 35A) is provided, and the ball entry portion and the passage portion are arranged such that the gaming ball having passed through the passage portion can enter the ball entry portion. If the effect of the game round is performed by the symbol display device 42 based on the passage of the game ball through this passing part, the effect of suppressing the player from being bored is exhibited. It is possible. And even with such a configuration, since the request for effect for the game circulation to the symbol display device 42 can be duplicated, the above effect can be suitably exhibited by providing a means for replacing the effect in the case of duplication. It becomes.

  That is, as described above, when there are a plurality of start opportunities for the effects of the game turn, the effect of the game turn related to the profit for the player among them (the effect based on entering the ball into the ball) is more real time It is necessary to inform the player of the lottery result related to the profit. Also, as a matter of course, it is assumed that a player is highly interested in the presentation of game times related to such a profit. In this case, for example, after the effect of the game run being executed (effect based on entering the ball into the passing section) is performed until the end, the effect of the game cycle reflecting the result of the transition determination (the ball entering the ball entering section If the player starts to make a presentation based on the above, the player feels tired by the fact that the presentation has nothing to do with the result of the winning lottery despite the fact that he wants to know the result of the winning lottery quickly. I can not hold you. If this is done, it is possible for the player to have a disturbing configuration for the game production based on the passage of the passage section prepared so that the player will not get bored.

  Therefore, in such a case, by replacing the effect of the game play being executed with the effect of the game play corresponding to the result of the acceptance lottery, without feeling the above-mentioned malaise, the effect of the game play is realized. The effects of the frequent configuration can be suitably achieved.

  (10) In the first and second embodiments, when the request for the effect for the game circulation is duplicated, the effect is replaced regardless of the remaining fluctuation display time of the game operation being executed, but it is as follows: It may be changed to That is, when the main control device 71 determines that the remaining variation display time of the game run being executed is less than the predetermined period (predetermined time), the sound and light control device 300 (or the display control device 400) performs the execution. It is good also as composition which starts an effect (special figure sub change) of a game turn continuing after an end of a game time (in the end of a 図 figure sub change) in a middle. In this case, for example, it is possible to execute the game round corresponding to the ceiling without a sense of incompatibility, without the need to re-variate these in a situation where all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped.

  As a specific process of this configuration, in the first embodiment, in the acquired information setting process (FIG. 23), a process of grasping the remaining variable display time on the common drawing side is added before step S1201, When the fluctuation display time of is a predetermined period determined in advance (for example, a period corresponding to all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 already stopping), the fluctuation display time of the special figure main fluctuation is set to the support mode It is assumed that the corresponding special display variation display time. Then, in this case, the general drawing sub-variation is ended as it is according to the fluctuation display time set at the time of the start. When the predetermined period set in advance is set to be long, the process may be ended immediately. In this case, a command to that effect is output to the sound light control device 300 so as to immediately end, and the sound light control device 300 side immediately ends the effect under execution by receiving the command. It is good to set it as the structure which replaces production | presentation.

  Furthermore, a command (a command for change and a type command) to that effect is output to the sound light control apparatus 300 so that the special drawing sub change is performed subsequently to the common drawing sub change being executed. Here, the fluctuation display time of the special drawing sub fluctuation is a time obtained by subtracting the remaining fluctuation display time of the general drawing side from the fluctuation display time of the special drawing main fluctuation, and information of the fluctuation display time is a command to that effect. And output to the sound light control apparatus 300. By doing this, it is possible to match the end timing of the effect (special figure sub fluctuation) of the game turn on the sound light control device 300 side and the end timing of the fluctuation display (special figure main fluctuation) on the main control device 71 side It becomes.

  As a modified example of the second embodiment, the acquisition processing (FIG. 30) of the holding information on the common drawing side is changed, and the acquisition information setting processing (FIG. 33) is changed.

  In the processing for acquiring the suspension information on the general drawing side of the present modification, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 55, the processing of step S3201 to step S3210 is executed as in steps S1701 to S1710. Then, in step S3211, it is determined whether or not an effect of the game play as a common drawing sub variation is being performed by determining whether or not the common drawing common calculator is "0". If the common drawing sub change is performed, the common drawing main change is also performed, and the remaining change display time of the common drawing main change under execution is grasped in step S 3212. Then, in step S3213, it is determined based on the processing result of step S3212 whether or not the remaining fluctuation display time of the general drawing main fluctuation being executed is shorter than a predetermined period.

  If the remaining fluctuation display time of the common drawing main fluctuation is equal to or more than the predetermined period, the ceiling replacement flag in step S3214 is set to “1”, and the ceiling replacement command in step S3215 is set as the output target Do. If the remaining fluctuation display time of the common drawing main fluctuation is shorter than the predetermined period, the processing of step S3214 and step S3215 is not performed. As a result, even if a ball entry corresponding to the ceiling occurs during execution of the common drawing sub-change, the common drawing sub-variation during execution can be ended by the passage of the fluctuation display time (step S1906: NO) ).

  If it is determined in step S3213 that the remaining fluctuation display time of the general fluctuation main fluctuation is shorter than the predetermined period, a process of setting “1” to the end flag provided in the RAM 84 is executed in step S3216. The finished flag is a flag for the MPU 82 to grasp that the spread diagram sub-variation being executed is ended by the passage of the variation display time even when the ball entry corresponding to the ceiling occurs. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3211, or after the process of step S3215 or step S3216 has been performed, the ceiling flag is set to "1" in step S3217, and the first plain prize winning counter is selected in step S3218. Is executed, and then the processing for acquiring the suspension information on the general drawing side ends.

  In the acquired information setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 56, it is determined whether or not the high frequency flag is set to “1” in step S3301, and the high frequency flag is not set to “1”. In step S3302, it is determined whether "1" is set in the above-described end flag. If "1" is not set in the end flag, in steps S3303 to S3306, processing for grasping the remaining fluctuation display time of the common drawing main fluctuation is performed. The processes of steps S3303 to S3306 are similar to the processes of steps S2002 to S2005.

  If "1" is set in the end flag in step S3302, in step S3307, processing is executed to grasp the special map fluctuation time corresponding to the support mode. Then, in step S3308, the special drawing stop result is grasped, and in step S3309, processing for setting the fluctuation time grasped in step S3306 or step S3307 in the special drawing special power timer counter is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3310.

  Thus, when the remaining fluctuation display time of the common drawing main fluctuation is short, the special drawing fluctuation time corresponding to the support mode is set.

  In step S3310, it is determined whether "1" is set in the high frequency flag, and if it is not set, the process proceeds to step S3311. In step S3311, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the above-mentioned end flag, and if it is not set, in step S3312 and step S3313, check processing of the ceiling replacement flag and processing for deleting it Run. These processes are similar to the processes of steps S2010 and S2011. If a negative determination is made in step S3310, if the end flag is set to "1" in step S3311, or after the process of step S3313 is executed, the variation command and type command are output in step S3314. Execute the process to set the target. The processes of steps S3315 and S3316 are the same as the processes of steps S2013 and S2014. Thereby, when the remaining fluctuation display time of the common drawing main fluctuation is short, the common drawing sub fluctuation corresponding to the common drawing main fluctuation is ended, and the fluctuation command for the special drawing sub fluctuation and the type command are sound light It is output to the control device 300 side.

  The processing on the sound light control apparatus 300 side by receiving the variation command for special drawing sub variation and the type command is the same as that of the first embodiment. That is, after the processes of steps S2101 to 2110 in the effect determination process (FIG. 34), the processes of steps S1408 to S1420 in the effect determination process (FIG. 25) of the first embodiment are performed. Thereby, when the general drawing sub variation being executed is ended without receiving the ceiling replacement command, the game as the special drawing sub variation is performed based on the received special drawing variation command and type command. Times are performed.

  In this way, a negative determination does not occur at step S1603 in the symbol replacement process by timing (FIG. 28) or at step S2205 in the effect replacement process (FIG. 35), and the game times corresponding to the ceiling are long-term It is possible to reduce the feeling of tiredness due to being performed over a long period of time, and the sense of discomfort with which the game play once thought to have ended may be rolled over again.

  In addition, said predetermined period is not restricted to the period corresponding to all symbol row Z1-Z3 having stopped, For example, if it is the period corresponding to the figure below pattern row Z3 having stopped, the symbol which was at least the symbol There is no need to cause the row Z3 to be changed again to generate the reach display, and the effect of reducing the above-mentioned discomfort can be enhanced.

  In addition, when the remaining fluctuation display time of the common drawing sub fluctuation being executed is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) determined in advance, the fluctuation display time on the special drawing side is the remaining fluctuation of the common drawing sub fluctuation Instead of the display time, a special drawing fluctuation time corresponding to the support mode may be used. Hereinafter, this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The flowchart of FIG. 57 shows a process that is executed instead of the acquired information setting process in the second embodiment.

  That is, similar to the processing of step S2001 to step S2004, after the processing of step S3401 to step S3404 is executed, processing of grasping the remaining fluctuation display time of the common drawing main fluctuation is executed in step S3405. In the following step S3405, based on the processing result in step S3405, it is determined whether or not the remaining remaining fluctuation display time is longer than a predetermined period determined in advance. Then, if it is longer than the predetermined period, in step S3407, a process of grasping the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the support mode is executed. If it is less than the predetermined period in step S3406, or after the process of step S3407 is executed, the special drawing stop result is grasped in step S3408, and the time grasped in step S3405 or step S3407 is noted in step S3409. Executes processing to set to the special power timer counter. The processes of steps S3408 to S3415 are the same as the processes of steps S2009 to S2014.

  Thereby, when the remaining fluctuation display time of the common drawing sub fluctuation being executed is longer than the predetermined period determined in advance, it is set as the special drawing fluctuation time corresponding to the support mode. In this case, on the sound and light control device 300 side, in step S2114 of the effect determination process (FIG. 34), the special game fluctuation time corresponding to the support mode is set to the special game fluctuation time being executed. Execute change processing of the variable display time.

  By doing this, when the remaining variable display time of the common drawing sub fluctuation being executed is too long, it is possible to promptly notify the special drawing side of the success or failure judgment result. As a result, it is possible to quickly shift to the open / close execution mode, and a smooth game can be realized.

  (11) The same replacement process (big hit dummy replacement process) as the effect replacement process (FIG. 26, FIG. 35) by the sound and light control device 300 may be executed other than the game times corresponding to the ceiling. That is, even if the game is not compatible with the ceiling, re-variation or the like of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is performed at a predetermined probability. Thereby, when re-variation or the like of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is performed, it can be expected that the player corresponds to the ceiling.

  (12) In each of the above embodiments, the special power prize device 32 may be provided in the left side area PE2 or the lower side area PE4. By doing this, it is possible to make a prize in the through gate 35A (special role product 33) even in the opening / closing execution mode, and it is possible to advance the count to the ceiling (first common drawing prize counter).

  (13) In the first to third embodiments, the end timing of the effect on the symbol display device 42 side in the game turn corresponding to the ceiling is changed by the lottery result display unit 37 (especially the first special view display unit 38a) The timing to finish the effect on the symbol display device 42 and the timing to shift to the opening / closing execution mode are matched by matching the timing to the end timing of the symbol display device 42. It may be set to be slightly earlier or slightly later.

  (14) In the first and second embodiments, the effect when replacing the effect on the symbol display device 42 side is not limited to the above. The point is that the effect pattern after replacement is determined based on at least information of the effect pattern before replacement (address As (1) to As (x)), thereby associating effects before and after replacement, and replacement It is possible to associate or not produce the preceding and following effects.

  (15) In the fourth embodiment, the distribution table for the second special figure to be referred to at the time of winning in the second special winning opening 253 may be distributed to the actual winning result B. By doing this, it is possible to suppress gambling feelings without excessively increasing the ball expansion rate.

  However, in order to increase the possibility that a large number of prize balls can be obtained by a substantial group as the numerical value of the first popular figure winning counter is farther from the ceiling, the second special table than the first special figure distribution table It is better to set so that the probability that the special drawing distribution table will be allocated to the actual result B is lower.

  (16) In the fourth embodiment, the relationship between the first special view distribution table and the second special view distribution table may be reversed. Specifically, the first special drawing distribution table has a higher probability of being allocated to the result A per real than the second special drawing distribution table, and the second special distribution table is more effective than the second special drawing distribution table. The probability of being assigned to result B per substance is made higher than the assignment table for the first special drawing. In this way, the probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode is reduced based on the winning on the second special prize port 253, and the mode is shifted to the high frequency supporting mode on the basis of the winning on the first special prize port 52. The probability is high. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is how to not distribute to the result per real B by the distribution determination based on the winning to the second special prize port 253, that is, how to reach the ceiling early It is the heart of continuing the Therefore, it is considered that the player further wins the through gate 35A (special role product 33) in a situation where the number of reservations on the second special view side is the upper limit number, in order to advance only the actual count to the ceiling. It becomes possible to urge the continuous firing of the gaming ball in such a situation.

  (17) In the fourth embodiment, the frequent support mode with no limit may be provided. Even in this case, in order to exert the effect of not raising the ball out rate too much, it is possible to shift to the low frequency support mode at least after reaching the ceiling, that is, substantially in the distribution table for the first special view. If the configuration allows the winning result B to be distributed, the continuation of the high-frequency support mode can be substantially suppressed by the number of passes to the through gate 35A, not by the number of game times. However, in order to realize the game characteristic of adjusting the game ball firing operation in relation to the specified number of terminations and the ceiling shown in the fourth embodiment, the high frequency support mode with the number limitation is set. It needs to be done.

  (18) In the fourth embodiment described above, the ceiling function of the special character 33 is used to make it possible to further win in the situation where the number of reservations on the second special view side is the upper limit number. May be realized by internal control of the gaming machine or the like. That is, for example, a starting ball storage unit is provided in the game area PE, and based on the game ball entering the starting ball storage unit, special information such as the jackpot random number counter C1 is acquired with the specified number as the upper limit, and the special When the information corresponds to a big hit, the player is given a privilege by opening / closing execution mode etc., and when the number of balls entering the starting entry portion reaches the number corresponding to the ceiling, If the player is given a benefit regardless of the special information, even if the number of special information is a prescribed number, it is possible to give significance to the player entering the starting ball entry section. .

  (19) In the first to third embodiments, the number of passes to the through gate 35A may be matched with the number of times of game execution to be performed to the ceiling. This combination includes, for example, a configuration in which a reservation area capable of storing reservation information for general drawing is provided more than the number of ceilings, or a lid or the like not to win through gate 35A while common drawing sub variation is being executed. A configuration in which animals are provided can be considered.

  (20) In the first embodiment, although the variation display time of the game run (common variation sub variation) is extended or shortened according to the variation display time of the special figure main variation, it is being executed. The variation display time of the game times may not be extended or shortened. If it is not configured to extend the variation display time of the running game, the running game is ended before the special figure main variation is finished according to the jackpot result, and the variation display of the running game is displayed. Assuming that the time is not shortened, the game time being executed after the special figure main change ends is ended in correspondence with the jackpot result. Therefore, a gap occurs at the end timing of the variable display of the special figure display unit 38 and the symbol display device 42, but in the relation with the open / close execution mode, for example, after switching to the open / close execution mode in the open / close execution mode By adjusting the opening period up to the start of the opening and closing control of the special power winning device 32, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player. In this case, the opening period is continued until the special figure main variation ends if the sub variation ends earlier than the special figure main variation, and the sub period changes later than the special figure main variation. The opening period may be continued until the end of the fluctuation.

  In particular, in the case of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, when transitioning to the open / close execution mode on the ceiling (winning to the special winning opening 52), it is necessary to switch the launch mode of the launch operation device 28. Therefore, in the sound-light control device 300, an effect (for example, right-click, and display on the display screen 42a) instructing the player to perform such switching is performed in the opening effect. Therefore, even if the opening period is extended as described above, the player may feel annoyed that the period from the notification of the jackpot result to the start of the opening / closing control of the special power prize device 32 becomes long. It can be suppressed.

  (21) In each of the above embodiments, the sound and light control apparatus 300 may be configured to be able to grasp the number of times up to the ceiling. As this configuration, each time the first common prize winning counter is updated in the main controller 71, and when the power is turned on, a command for grasping the numerical value of the first common prize winning counter is transmitted from the main control 71 as sound. It is preferable to be configured to output to the control device 300.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the value (the number of times to the ceiling) of the first common drawing prize counter of the RAM 84 of the main control device 71 is stored and maintained even by the power supply and the backup power supply from the launch control device 78. . On the other hand, in the sound light control device 300, the number of times up to the ceiling is not stored and held when the power is off. Therefore, for example, when notifying the number of times to the ceiling in the sound and light control device 300 or changing the effect contents (for example, the background image of the display screen 42a and the like) according to the number of times staying, sound light control at power on. The device 300 needs to know the number of times to the ceiling. Therefore, the significance of the above configuration arises.

  (22) The special character 33 is also provided with a passage portion through which the game ball can enter other than the ball passage opening 33a, and the game ball passing through the passage portion is also led out to the middle of the first passage 51a. Good. In this case, since the sorting board 54 is operated by the gaming ball having passed through the passage section, the number of times to the ceiling is switched halfway, and diversification of the game can be achieved.

  Also, for example, assuming that a game ball rolling on a stage provided below the display screen 42a is led out to the passage section by a warp passage or the like, this is for the player viewing the display screen 42a. Since the rolling game ball also enters the view, in addition to the game of confirming the contents of the effects on the display screen 42a, a new game of confirming the operation of the game ball rolling on this stage is added, and the interest is improved It is more preferable from the viewpoint of

  (23) In the second and third embodiments described above, the special drawing is executed at the timing when the fluctuation on the common drawing side ends, according to the remaining variable display time on the common drawing side during the execution of the variable drawing time on the special drawing side. Although it is configured to determine that the fluctuation on the side is also completed, from the viewpoint of effecting by associating the fluctuation on the regular drawing side with the fluctuation on the special drawing side, the fluctuation display time on the special drawing side is Any configuration may be used as long as it is determined according to the operating condition.

  For example, in the acquired information setting process (FIG. 33, FIG. 40) in main controller 71, the remaining fluctuation display time of the common drawing main fluctuation is grasped (step S2005, step S2504, step S2506) In the setting process (step S2008, step S2510), it may be set so as to be longer than the grasped time, or may be set so as to be shorter. If it is set to be set longer, the variation display on the special view display unit 38 is finished after the variation display on the symbol display unit 42 is finished, and as the player, the symbol display unit 42 than the special view display unit 38 Thus, it is possible to grasp the success or failure judgment result on the special drawing side, and as a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the symbol display device 42. On the other hand, if it is configured to be set short, before the variation display of the symbol is finished in the symbol display device 42, the variation display in the special view display unit 38 is finished. 32 open / close control can be started. Therefore, it is possible to realize the surprising effect that the winning result is notified by the other part (special power prize device 32) before the notification on the symbol display device 42 side. In addition, in this configuration, in order to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention on the symbol display device 42 side, for example, it may be configured to be set shorter than the remaining fluctuation display time of the common drawing main fluctuation with a predetermined probability.

  Further, in the configuration in which a plurality of general drawing side retention information can be stored as in the third embodiment, the variation display time of the special view side is determined according to the number of general purpose drawing side retention information stored at the special figure winning. The configuration may be determined. In this case, the variable display time table of the special view side according to the number of the hold information is stored in advance in the ROM 83, and in the acquisition information setting process in the main control device 71, the number of the hold information on the general drawing side and the change It is preferable to determine the variation display time on the special drawing side with reference to the display time table. When this configuration is adopted in the third embodiment, the fluctuation display time on the common drawing side is set as a constant period regardless of the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. Then, using the process of step S2507 in the acquired information setting process (FIG. 40) of the main control device 71, the number of suspension information up to the area for which the ceiling information was confirmed in step S2505 and the above variable display time table Change to processing to grasp the fluctuation display time of the hold information including the hold information corresponding to the information. As a result, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the fluctuation display time of the hold information is grasped respectively.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

  In addition, as for the following feature A group, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entry area provided in the game area, and a pattern is displayed on the display screen of the display device The variable display is performed, and when the winning result is obtained by the lottery, the combination of the specific pattern etc. is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the configuration is known to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074175.) In such a gaming machine, if there is a long period of time in which the ball does not enter the ball entry section, the special gaming state is entered in that period. Not only the transition lottery is not performed, but also the fluctuation display on the display screen is not performed, and the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, there is still room for improvement in increasing attention to the game. " Has been made in view of the technical background and issues, etc. say.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. A launcher (game ball launch mechanism 27) for launching the game ball to the game zone (game zone PE);
A first ball entry portion (special winning opening 52) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
Transition determination means (specifically, the main control device 71 executes transition determination of whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special state advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering the first ball entry portion. Function to execute the judgment process on the figure side
When the determination result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is a transition response result corresponding to the transition to the special state, special state transition means (special control by the main control device 71) shifts the gaming state to the special state Function to execute processing during figure confirmation),
Display means (symbol display device 42) for executing a predetermined display effect;
Based on the transition determination performed by the transition determination unit, the display unit starts the game operation, and ends the game operation as a stop result corresponding to the transition determination result. A first game execution means (a function for executing an effect determination process by the sound and light control device 300);
In a gaming machine provided with
The game area is provided with a second ball entry section (through gate 35A) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter separately from the first ball entry section,
The transition determination means does not perform the transition determination based on entering the ball into the second ball entry portion,
Based on the game ball entering the second ball entry section, the display means starts the game use operation, and performs a second game run to end the game use operation with a predetermined stop result Means,
The game-use operation corresponds to the determination result of the transition determination based on the fact that the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means during execution of the game-use operation by the second game times execution means Game turn exchange means (function to execute the effect replacement process by the sound and light control device 300) for replacing the game turn operation being executed so as to become the game turn operation;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A1, the transition determination is performed based on the game ball entering the first ball entry portion, and the game operation is performed in the display means, and the determination result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result In a gaming machine that transitions to a special state advantageous to the player in some cases, the game circulation operation is also performed based on entering the second ball entry portion. That is, since the game circulation operation is performed not only based on the first ball entry unit but also based on the ball entry to the second ball reception unit, comparison with the configuration to perform the game circulation operation based on only the first ball entry unit The game circulation operation is frequently performed. By adopting such a configuration, even if the period in which the ball does not occur in the first ball entry section continues for a long time, the game means can display the game based on the ball entry in the second ball entry section. Since the game operation is performed, it is possible to suppress the player from being bored.

  However, in such a configuration, when the ball entering the first ball entry occurs while executing the game circulation action based on the ball entering the second ball entry, a request for the game circulation action Will be duplicated. That is, the game circulation operation is performed so as to obtain a predetermined stop result based on entering the ball into the second ball entry, and under this situation, the determination of the transition judgment based on the ball entering into the first ball entry The request for the game circulation operation that results in the stop result corresponding to the result will be duplicated.

  And since the game circulation operation based on entering the ball into the first ball entry reflects the result of the transition judgment and is involved in the player's profit, the judgment result concerning the profit (transition result When a) occurs, it is necessary to inform the player of the determination result without delaying the return of the profit. That is, despite the fact that the gaming machine is already in a state of returning profits (in the stage before transitioning to the special state), an operation unrelated to that is performed endlessly as the game circulation operation Is not desirable. The reason is that the game is fair, because only the player who knows that he has moved to the special state can receive the benefit of the special state if he does not notify the special state even though the special state has been made. It is difficult to secure the

  Therefore, in this gaming machine, in such a case, the above-mentioned inconvenience is eliminated by replacing the running game operation with the running game operation corresponding to the result of the shift determination, and the running game operation is performed. The effects of the frequent configuration can be suitably achieved.

  Therefore, the attention degree to a game can be raised suitably.

Feature A2. Notification means (lottery result display unit 37) provided separately from the display means and performing a predetermined notification;
Variable display means for starting fluctuation display by the notification means based on the judgment of the transition by the transition judgment means, and stopping the fluctuation display as a stop result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment ( A function of executing a special drawing special power control process by the main controller 71),
Equipped with
The special state transition means, when the determination result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result, the game state is changed to the special state after the fluctuation display in the notification means by the fluctuation display means is stopped or simultaneously with the stop. Transition to the
When the game cycle operation is replaced by the game cycle replacement means, the game cycle operation after the replacement is ended in time with the time when the variable display by the variable display means is stopped by the operation. Setting means (in the first embodiment, a function to execute the effect replacement process by the sound and light control device 300, and in the second and third embodiments, step S2005 to step S2008 by the main control device 71 and step S2504 , A function to execute the process of step S2509 and step S2510), The gaming machine according to the feature A1.

  According to the above configuration, the determination result of the shift determination means is notified by the notification means separately from the display means. Then, if the determination result is the transition correspondence result, the gaming state shifts to the special state after or at the same time as the variation display of the notification means is stopped. In this case, the game cycle operation on the display means side may be replaced by the game cycle replacing means, but the fluctuation display on the notification means side is not replaced. Therefore, in the case where the result of the transition determination associated with entering the first ball entry portion is displayed on the display means and the notification means, if the timing of stopping each display is deviated, the effect is continued However, it is considered that the player may be in a special state and inconveniences such as the player who is looking at each display may feel discomfort.

  That is, for example, if the display stop timing of the display means is too early with respect to the notification stop time of the notification means, there is a possibility that the player who is looking at not only the display means but the notification means may cause frustration. . Conversely, if the timing of the notification stop by the notification means is too early with respect to the display stop timing of the display means, the result of the shift determination is known before the display stop of the display means, and the display waits for the display stop There is a risk of intriguing.

  Therefore, according to the above configuration, the degree of attention can be suitably improved without causing such a problem.

  Feature A3. The setting means shortens the remaining operation period of the game circulation operation by the second game times execution means according to a period from the start of the variable display to the stop in the notification means. The gaming machine according to the feature A2, comprising means for extending (function of executing the processing of step S1501 to step S1504 and step S1506 by the sound and light control device 300).

  According to the above configuration, when replacing the game operation by the game cycle replacement means, the effect of the feature A2 can be exhibited without changing the period of the variable display on the notification means side.

  In particular, by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to set in advance the period from the start of the variable display in the notification means to the stop regardless of the replacement by the game replacement means, and the replacement is frequent Since the preset time period can be used in the game circulation operation that is not performed, the progress of the game can be made smooth.

  Feature A4. The setting means sets the period from the start of the variable display to the stop in the notification means to be the remaining operation period of the game circulation operation by the second game times execution means under execution The gaming machine according to the feature A2, comprising: means for performing (the function of executing the processing of step S2005, step S2008, and step S2012 by the main control device 71).

  According to the above configuration, when replacing the game run operation by the game cycle replacement means, the effect of the feature A2 can be exhibited without changing the operation period of the game run operation on the display means side.

  In particular, by adopting such a configuration, the operation period on the display means side does not change, and therefore, it is possible to suppress that the operation for one game cycle is extremely prolonged upon replacement, and to reduce the discomfort given to the player. Can.

Feature A5. The second ball entry unit is configured to allow passage of gaming balls in the gaming area,
The first ball entering portion is provided at a position where the game ball can enter the ball by the game ball passing through the second ball entering portion,
In the game circulation operation by the second game times execution means, the operation period is longer than the period required for the game ball having passed the second ball entry portion to enter the first ball entry portion The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A4 characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, when the game ball enters the first ball entry part, the game ball may pass through the second ball entry part at a timing earlier than that. . And, the game circulation operation by the second game times execution means includes an operation period that is longer than a period required for the game ball having passed the second ball entry portion to enter the first ball entry portion Because the game ball which has passed the second ball entry section as described above enters the first ball entry section as described above, the game circulation operation based on the passage of the second ball entry section has not ended Sometimes. In such a case, although the request for the game operation is duplicated as described above, since the game operation is replaced as shown in the feature A1, the effect shown in the feature A1 is exhibited. Can.

  Feature A6. It is provided in a ball passage area where passage of gaming balls is possible from the second ball entering portion to the first ball entering portion, and the game balls having passed through the second ball entering portion to the first ball entering portion A distribution means (distribution plate 54) for distributing to any one of the first passage for entering the ball and the second passage for not entering the ball at the first ball entry part is provided. Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball having passed through the second ball entry unit is caused to enter the first ball entry unit by the sorting means. Therefore, although it becomes possible to enter the ball into the first ball entry part by passing the second ball entry part, all will enter the first ball entry part even though it has passed through the second ball entry part Not necessarily, it is possible to cause cases in which replacement of the game circulation operation can be performed by the game circulation replacement means and a case in which the replacement can not be performed. This makes it possible to diversify the effects.

  Feature A7. The distribution means is characterized by shifting to a state in which the game ball is caused to enter the first ball entry part as the predetermined number of game balls pass through the second ball entry part. The gaming machine described in A6.

  According to the above configuration, the sorting means shifts to a state in which the game ball is entered into the first ball entry unit as the predetermined number of game balls pass through the second entry unit. That is, in order to cause the game ball to enter the first ball entry portion and receive the transition determination, it is one condition to pass the predetermined number of game balls in the second ball entry portion. In this case, it is considered that the player who plays the game machine actively continues the game in anticipation that a certain number of benefits will be obtained by passing a predetermined number of game balls in the second ball entry unit. This makes it possible to promote the player's continuous game. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest in the game and to increase the player's willingness to play.

Feature A8. A grasping means (for example, the main control device 71) for grasping which passage of the first passage and the second passage the distributing means distributes the game ball to when the game ball passes through the second ball entry portion Function to execute the process of step S1710)
When the game ball having passed through the second ball entry unit is grasped by the grasping means when it is distributed to the first passage, the second before the start of the game circulation operation by the first game times execution means A feature A6 or A, characterized by comprising end restriction means (a function for executing the processing of step S1712 and step S1906 by the main control device 71) for restricting the end of the game circulation operation by the game times execution device The gaming machine according to feature A7.

  According to the above configuration, in the case of entering the first ball entry part, the end of the game circulation operation by the second game execution means is restricted. As a result, there is no event that the running game running operation ends before the playing cycle replacement means changes the running game operation.

  That is, if it is determined that the game ball having passed through the second ball entry section is to be distributed to the first passage, then it is determined that the game circulation operation by the second game execution means is started at that point After that, even if the game ball enters the first ball entry part after that, the second game circulation action is performed while the game circulation action corresponding to the ball entry into the first ball entry part is not executed. There is a risk of termination. On the other hand, according to the above configuration, in such a case, since the termination of the game operation by the second game times execution unit being executed by the end restriction unit is restricted, the game repetition unit is a game. It is possible to avoid such a disadvantage that there is no target game circulation operation despite the replacement of the circulation operation.

Feature A9. Based on the game ball entering the second ball entry section, an advantage determination of whether or not to shift the game state to an advantage state that is advantageous for the player and is more disadvantageous than the special state is performed. Advantage determination means (function to execute the success / failure determination process on the general drawing side by the main controller 71);
When the determination result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is an advantageous response result corresponding to the transition to the advantageous state, the advantageous transition means for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous state (general diagram by the main control device 71 Function to execute processing during confirmation),
Equipped with
The second game times execution unit starts the game circulation operation on the display unit based on the fact that the advantage determination is performed by the advantage determination unit, and makes the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the advantage determination. A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, characterized in that the game cycle operation is ended.

  According to the above configuration, at least the advantage determination is performed although the transition determination is not performed based on the game ball entering the second ball entry portion, so the game circulation operation without the transition determination is performed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the degree of attention in the case. However, since the special state is more advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, it is assumed that the player is more interested in transitioning to the special state than the advantageous state, and is described in the feature A1. As described above, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the game circulation operation not accompanied by the transition determination while leaving the significance of replacing the game circulation operation.

  Feature A10. When the determination result of the advantage determination that has triggered the game circulation operation in the game circulation operation by the second game circulation execution means is the advantageous correspondence result, The gaming machine according to the feature A9, further comprising replacement limitation means (for example, a function of executing the process of step S1414 by the sound and light control device 300) which does not replace the game operation operation being executed.

  According to the above configuration, when the determination result of the advantage determination based on entering the ball into the second ball entry portion is the result of the advantage response, it overlaps with the request for the game circulation operation caused by the transition determination being performed. Even in this case, the advantage determination takes precedence. By doing this, it is possible to make the game circulation operation based on entering the ball into the second ball entry part more effective.

Characteristics A11. Operation mode determination means (for example, a function for executing the processing of step S1404 and step S1414 by the sound and light control apparatus 300) for determining an operation mode (rendering pattern) when the game-use operation is performed,
The said operation mode determination means is based on the operation mode of the said game circulation operation | movement by said 2nd game circulation execution means in execution, when replacement | exchange of the said game circulation operation | movement is performed by the said game circulation substitution means. A unit characterized in that it comprises means (function to execute the effect replacement process by the sound and light control device 300) for determining the operation mode of the game circulation operation by the first game times execution unit after replacement. The gaming machine according to any one of A10.

  According to the above configuration, the operation mode of the game circulation operation by the second game times execution unit being executed and the operation mode after replacement are performed as a series of operations with predetermined relevance (regularity). Unlike in the case where replacement is performed without such a relation, it is possible to give the player a great interest (in other words, a sense of expectation) as to what can be replaced with what.

  Feature A12. The operation mode determination means is an operation mode for the game circulation operation by the first game times execution means after the replacement, when at least the game circulation action is replaced by the game circulation means. The gaming machine according to the feature A11, wherein the operation mode is determined so as to be a continuous operation mode from the operation mode of the game operation for the second game times execution means being executed.

  According to the above configuration, when the game routine operation is replaced, the operation mode which has been performed up to that time is replaced so as to be a continuous operation mode. As a result, it is possible to reduce the situation where the player feels the effect of the game as emptiness without wasting the game circulation operation which has been performed until then. Also, by doing this, it is possible to reduce the discomfort when replacing.

  In addition, "the operation mode of the operation for the game turn by the first game times execution means after replacement is a continuous action form from the operation mode of the game turn by the second game times execution means being executed" For example, the same character may continue the rendering with the same appearance, or the rendering of the same story tailoring may be continued.

  Feature A13. The operation mode determination unit executes the operation mode of the game circulation operation by the first game circulation execution unit after the replacement, when at least the game circulation operation is replaced by the game circulation replacement unit. The gaming machine according to the feature A11, wherein the operation mode is determined so as to be a non-continuous operation mode from the operation mode of the gaming routine operation by the second game times execution means.

  According to the above configuration, when the game routine operation is replaced, the operation mode which has been performed up to that time is replaced with the operation mode which is not continuous. Therefore, it is easy for the player to notice that the game switching operation has been replaced, and it is recognized that the transition determination has been performed, and it is expected that the determination result is the transition response result. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the effect to be replaced by the non-continuous operation mode.

  In addition, “the operation mode not continuous from the operation mode of the game circulation operation by the second game circulation execution unit by the second game circulation execution unit during the operation mode of the game circulation operation by the first game circulation execution unit after replacement” is , The character appearing in the rendition is changed, the form is changed, and rendition of different story tailoring is performed.

Feature A14. The game cycle operation starts variable display of a plurality of symbols by the display means, and causes the variable display of the plurality of symbols to be a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination or a predetermined stop result. When the determination result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition correspondence result, the combination of the reach patterns which may possibly be a combination of predetermined symbols is stopped and displayed. The reach state is obtained by causing the reach state to perform reach change (reach display) in the reach state, and thereafter, the reach change is ended as a combination of the predetermined pattern,
It has a determination means for determining whether or not the variable display of each of the patterns is performed,
The gaming cycle replacing means is configured to execute the process of the second game cycle executing means while the transition judging means performs the transition judgment while the game judging action is being performed. When it is determined that the fluctuation display (high speed fluctuation) is performed, the stop pattern of each of the patterns in the fluctuation display is replaced to perform the reach fluctuation, and one of the patterns is determined by the determination unit. When it is determined that the variable display of is completed or the preparation operation (low speed fluctuation) before stopping is determined, the pattern of the variable display is completed or the pattern is transferred to the preparation operation The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A13, wherein the variation display is performed again and the stop pattern of the pattern is further replaced to perform the reach variation.

  According to the above configuration, when changing the game operation, even if the game operation being executed is not scheduled to perform the reach change, the reach change can be performed. That is, when the determination result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result, reach variation ends as a combination of predetermined patterns, and it is desirable that the reach state is reached by each pattern as the premise. Then, when the game operation being executed is not scheduled to perform the reach change, there is a possibility that each pattern is stopped without being in the reach state. Therefore, it is determined whether the variation display of each pattern is performed by the determination means, and if all the symbols are in the change display, the stop pattern of those symbols is replaced and the reach variation is performed as the reach state thereafter. If one of the symbols is stopped or it shifts to the preparatory operation before stopping, it is displayed again in a fluctuating manner, and the stop pattern is replaced to reach the reach state, and the reach change is performed. As described above, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience when the reach state is not reached. Furthermore, when replacing the stop pattern in this way, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player feels the effect so far as being empty without wasting the previous effect when replacing the game operation operation. can do. In addition, it is possible to reduce the discomfort when replacing.

<Feature B group>
In addition, the following feature B group “as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entry area provided in the game area, and a pattern is displayed on the display screen of the display device. The variable display is performed, and when the winning result is obtained by the lottery, the combination of the specific pattern etc. is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the configuration is known to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074175.) If the period in which the ball entry to the above-mentioned ball entry does not occur continues for a long time, the transition lottery to the special game state is not only performed in that period. In addition, fluctuation display on the display screen is not performed, which may reduce the interest in the game.Therefore, there is still room for improvement in enhancing the degree of attention to the game. " It has been made.

Feature B1. A launcher (game ball launch mechanism 27) for launching the game ball to the game zone (game zone PE);
A first ball entry portion (special winning opening 52) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
Transition determination means (specifically, the main control device 71 executes transition determination of whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special state advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering the first ball entry portion. Function to execute the judgment process on the figure side
When the determination result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is a transition response result corresponding to the transition to the special state, special state transition means (special control by the main control device 71) shifts the gaming state to the special state Function to execute processing during figure confirmation),
Display means (symbol display device 42) for executing a predetermined display effect;
Based on the transition determination performed by the transition determination unit, the display unit starts the game operation, and ends the game operation as a stop result corresponding to the transition determination result. A first game execution means (a function for executing an effect determination process by the sound and light control device 300);
In a gaming machine provided with
The game area is provided with a second ball entry section (through gate 35A) in which game balls flowing down the game area separately from the first ball entry section are entered,
Based on the game ball entering the second ball entry section, the display means starts the game use operation, and performs a second game run to end the game use operation with a predetermined stop result Equipped with
The first ball entry unit is provided at a position where the game ball can enter the game ball by entering the game ball into the second ball entry unit,
Grasping means for grasping whether or not the gaming ball having entered the second ball entry section will subsequently enter the first ball entry section (step by the main control device 71 in the second and third embodiments) A function of executing the processing of steps S1710 to S1714 and steps S2311 to S2314),
When the game ball entered into the second entry section enters the first entry section based on the grasping by the grasping section, the game circulation operation by the second game execution section is executed, The game circulation execution means (the step S1812 or the step S2413 by the main control device 71 in the second or third embodiment) for executing the processing to be started as the game circulation operation corresponding to the ball entry to the first ball entry part Function to execute the processing of
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, the transition determination is performed based on the game ball entering the first ball entry portion, and the game operation is performed in the display means, and the determination result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result In a gaming machine that transitions to a special state advantageous to the player in some cases, the game circulation operation is also performed based on entering the second ball entry portion. That is, since the game circulation operation is performed not only based on the first ball entry unit but also based on the ball entry to the second ball reception unit, comparison with the configuration to perform the game circulation operation based on only the first ball entry unit The game circulation operation is frequently performed. By adopting such a configuration, even if the period in which the ball does not occur in the first ball entry section continues for a long time, the game means can display the game based on the ball entry in the second ball entry section. Since the game operation is performed, it is possible to suppress the player from being bored.

  However, the first ball entry part is provided at a position where the game ball entered into the second ball entry part can enter the ball, and in such a configuration, the game based on the ball entry into the second ball entry part If the first ball entry occurs while the turning operation is being performed, the request for the game turning operation will overlap. That is, the game circulation operation is performed so as to obtain a predetermined stop result based on entering the ball into the second ball entry, and under this situation, the determination of the transition judgment based on the ball entering into the first ball entry The request for the game circulation operation that results in the stop result corresponding to the result will be duplicated.

  And since the game circulation operation based on entering the ball into the first ball entry reflects the result of the transition judgment and is involved in the player's profit, the judgment result concerning the profit (transition result When a) occurs, it is necessary to inform the player of the determination result without delaying the return of the profit. That is, despite the fact that the gaming machine is already in a state of returning profits (in the stage before transitioning to the special state), an operation unrelated to that is performed endlessly as the game circulation operation. Is not desirable. The reason is that the game is fair, because only the player who knows that he has moved to the special state can receive the benefit of the special state if he does not notify the special state even though the special state has been made. It is difficult to secure the

  Therefore, in this gaming machine, in such a case, when it is determined that the game ball entered into the second ball entry part enters the first ball entry part in the grasping means, in the second game times execution means The game circulation operation is started in advance (as a game circulation operation corresponding to the ball entry into the first ball entry part (when the ball entry into the second ball entry part and before the ball entry into the first ball entry part) To be configured. Therefore, the above-mentioned inconvenience does not occur, and it is possible to preferably achieve the effect of the configuration in which the game switching operation is frequently performed.

  Therefore, the attention degree to a game can be raised suitably.

Feature B2. Notification means (lottery result display unit 37) which is provided separately from the display means and executes a predetermined notification;
Variable display means for starting fluctuation display by the notification means based on the judgment of the transition by the transition judgment means, and stopping the fluctuation display as a stop result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment ( A function of executing a special drawing special power control process by the main controller 71),
Equipped with
The special state transition means, when the determination result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result, the game state is changed to the special state after the fluctuation display in the notification means by the fluctuation display means is stopped or simultaneously with the stop. Transition to the
A setting means for setting so that the variable display by the variable display means is stopped in time with the end of the started game operation when the game operation is started by the game execution means. (Feature to execute the processing of step S2005 to step S2008, step S2504, step S2509 and step S2510 by the main controller 71 in the second and third embodiments) described in the feature B1 Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, the determination result of the shift determination means is notified by the notification means separately from the display means. Then, if the determination result is the transition correspondence result, the gaming state shifts to the special state after or at the same time as the variation display of the notification means is stopped. In this case, the game circulation operation on the display means side may also be started by the game round execution means at the timing before the transition determination, but the variable display on the notification means side is started based on the transition determination being performed. Ru. Therefore, in the case where the result of the transition determination associated with entering the first ball entry portion is displayed on the display means and the notification means, if the timing of stopping each display is deviated, the effect is continued However, it is considered that the player may be in a special state and inconveniences such as the player who is looking at each display may feel discomfort.

  That is, for example, if the display stop timing of the display means is too early with respect to the notification stop time of the notification means, there is a possibility that the player who is looking at not only the display means but the notification means may cause frustration. . Conversely, if the timing of the notification stop by the notification means is too early with respect to the display stop timing of the display means, the result of the shift determination is known before the display stop of the display means, and the display waits for the display stop There is a risk of intriguing.

  Therefore, according to the above configuration, the degree of attention can be suitably improved without causing such a problem.

  Feature B3. The setting means is a period from the start of the variable display to the stop in the notification means, and the remaining operation period of the game operation by the second game times execution means at the start of the variable display. The gaming machine according to the feature B2, comprising means for setting so as to be (function to execute the processing of step S2005, step S2008 and step S2012 by the main control device 71).

  According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature B2 can be exhibited without changing the period of the variable display on the display means side.

  In particular, with such a configuration, one game operation will be very prolonged in order to match the end timing of the game operation on the display means side with the end timing of the variable display on the notification means side. Can be suppressed, and the sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced.

  Feature B4. When the game ball having entered the second ball entry part enters the first ball entry part, the game round destination execution means determines the game by the second game cycle execution part when it is grasped by the grasping part If the game play operation is being performed, the game play operation by the second game play execution means does not start the game play operation, and the game play operation corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination is performed. A game machine according to any one of the features B1 to B3, characterized by comprising replacement means (a function of executing the processing of step S1713 by the main control device 71 and the processing of step S2110 by the sound and light control device 300).

  According to the above configuration, when it is determined by the grasping means that the ball enters the first ball entry unit, the game circulation execution means is the game circulation operation means when the game circulation operation by the second game circulation execution means is being performed. It is not possible to start the game circulation operation. Therefore, the game circulation operation by the second game times execution means is replaced to correspond to the result of the transition judgment. By doing in this way, when the game ball enters the second ball entry portion continuously, when the subsequent game ball enters the first ball entry portion, the result of the transition determination is preceded by It is possible to notify the player without waiting for the end of the game cycle operation (the game cycle operation by the second game cycle executing means) triggered by entering the second ball entry section of the second game.

  Feature B5. When the game ball having entered the second ball entry part enters the first ball entry part, the game round destination execution means determines the game by the second game cycle execution part when it is grasped by the grasping part An end restricting means for restricting the end of the game circulation operation by the second game circulation execution means before the start of the game circulation operation by the first game circulation execution means when the circulation operation is being performed ( The gaming machine according to the feature B4, comprising a function of executing the processing of step S1712 and step S1906 by the main control device 71.

  According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine of the feature B4, when entering the first ball entry part, the end of the game circulation operation by the second game execution means is restricted. As a result, before the stop result of the game operation is replaced as the stop result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment, there is no event that the game operation under execution is ended.

  That is, when it is grasped that the game ball entered in the second entry part enters the first entry part, at that time, the game circulation operation by the second game execution means is performed, The game circulation execution means can not start the game circulation operation. In this case, even if the game ball enters the first ball entry portion thereafter, there is a risk that the second game circulation operation may end. On the other hand, according to the above configuration, in such a case, since the termination of the game circulation operation by the second game times execution unit being executed is restricted by the termination restriction unit, the game circulation operation should be replaced However, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that there is no target game operation.

  Feature B6. The game circulation execution unit executes the game circulation operation so that the game circulation operation has a stop result (stop result corresponding to the big hit result) corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, which is characterized in that:

  According to the above configuration, even when the gaming cycle execution unit performs the gaming cycle operation before the transition determination of the transition determining unit, the gaming cycle operation can be suitably performed. That is, the transition determination means of the transition determination means is not determined at the time when the game occasion execution means starts the game conversion operation, but as shown in the feature B1, the game occurrence execution means is not performed the transition determination Start the game-use operation before the shift determination as the game-use operation corresponding to. Further, in the above configuration, the subsequent stop result is also started as that corresponding to the transition determination. That is, before the transition determination of the transition determination means, the determination result is first determined by a decisive strike, and the game circulation operation is started as the corresponding stop result. By doing this, it is possible to realize a configuration that starts and ends the corresponding game circulation operation before the transition determination.

  Feature B7. The stop result of the game run operation started by the game turn destination execution means is a stop result when the determination result of the shift determination by the shift determination means is the shift corresponding result. The gaming machine according to feature B6.

  According to the above configuration, the gaming times execution means starts the game circulation operation so that the transition response result is the stopping result. In this case, although there is a possibility that the result of the transition determination by the subsequent transition determination means will not be the transition response result, the player is expected to be the transition response result and pays attention to the game transfer operation It is possible to increase the degree.

  Feature B8. The gaming machine according to feature B7, wherein the winning probability of the transition determination by the transition determining means is 50% or more.

  According to the above configuration, 50% or more of the transition determination results in the transition response, and therefore, when the game-time execution unit starts the game operation, the transition response result is obtained regardless of the transition determination of the transition response result. Even if the game circulation operation is started so as to result in the stop result, it is possible to reduce the event that is not the transition correspondence result thereafter. Thereby, although the stop result of the game operation is the one corresponding to the transition correspondence result, actually, the determination result of the transition judgment means is different from the transition correspondence result and does not shift to the special state. can do. Therefore, it is possible to reduce confusion and discouragement given to the player.

  The higher the winning probability of the transition determination, the better, and more preferably 100%.

Feature B9. Based on the game ball entering the second ball entry section, it is determined whether or not to shift the game state to an advantage state that is advantageous to the player and is more disadvantageous than the special state. Advantage determination means (function to execute the success / failure determination process on the general drawing side by the main controller 71);
When the determination result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is an advantageous response result corresponding to the transition to the advantageous state, the advantageous transition means for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous state (general diagram by the main control device 71 Function to execute processing during confirmation),
Equipped with
The second game times execution means is determined by the advantage determination means when the grasping means grasps that the game ball entering the second ball entry part does not enter the first ball entry part. Based on the fact that the advantage determination has been made, the display means starts the operation for playing the game and ends the operation for playing the game according to the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the advantage determination. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8.

  According to the above configuration, at least the advantage determination is performed although the transition determination is not performed based on the game ball entering the second ball entry unit, but at least the advantage determination is performed. It is possible to suppress a drop in attention when it is However, since the special state is more advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, it is assumed that the player is more interested in transitioning to the special state than the advantageous state, as described in the feature B1. As described above, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the game circulation operation not accompanied by the transition judgment while leaving meaning to start the game circulation operation corresponding to the transition judgment by the game circulation execution means. .

Feature B10. When it is grasped that the ball enters the first ball entry part by the grasping means, it is a state that ball entry to the first ball entry part can occur in the display means or another rendering means Special notification execution means (a function for displaying the special reservation image P3 on the symbol display device 42 by the sound light control device 300) for executing the special notification of
The special notification execution means performs the special notification with a predetermined probability when it is determined by the grasping means that the first ball entry part does not enter the ball (steps S2707 and S2708 by the main control device 71) A game machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, characterized in that the game machine has a function of executing a process.

  According to the above configuration, the player can grasp that the game ball enters the first ball entry part by performing the special notification. In this configuration, the special notification is performed with a predetermined probability not only when entering the first ball entry part but also when not entering the first ball entry part. We expect that it corresponds to the ball entering to the first ball entering section to be performed. Thus, the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Feature B11. A game ball which is provided in a ball passage area (game ball passage area R) where passage of game balls is possible from the second ball entering portion to the first ball entering portion, and the ball is entered into the second ball entering portion Distribution means for distributing to either the first passage (first passage 51a) to enter the first ball entry portion or the second passage (second passage 51b) not to enter the first ball entry portion (Sorting plate 54),
The game ball entered into the second ball entry unit is determined by the grasping means grasping which passage, the first passage or the second passage, the game distributing means distributes the game ball to. A game machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, characterized by grasping whether or not to enter the first ball entry part.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball having entered the second ball entry part is to be entered into the first ball entry part by the sorting means. Therefore, although it becomes possible to enter the first entry section by entering the second entry section, everything enters the first entry section even if it enters the second entry section. It does not mean that the ball is played, but the game circulation operation is performed by the second game times execution unit, and the game circulation operation corresponding to the first ball entry portion is performed by the game circulation execution unit. be able to. This makes it possible to diversify the effects.

  Feature B12. The distribution means is characterized by shifting to a state in which the game ball is caused to enter the first ball entry part in accordance with the predetermined number of game balls enter the second ball entry part. The gaming machine according to feature B11.

  According to the above configuration, the sorting means is shifted to a state in which the game ball is caused to enter the first ball entry part as the predetermined number of game balls enter the second ball entry part. . That is, in order to cause the game ball to enter the first ball entry portion and to receive the transition determination, it is one condition that the predetermined number of game balls be entered in the second ball entry portion. In this case, it is considered that the player who plays the game machine actively continues the game in anticipation that a certain number of benefits can be obtained by the predetermined number of game balls entering the second ball entry unit. . This makes it possible to promote the player's continuous game. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest in the game and to increase the player's willingness to play.

<Feature C group>
In addition, the following feature C group “as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game ball shot by the player operating a launch device etc. entered a ball entry portion provided in the game area. A lottery is performed on the basis of which a variation display of symbols is performed on the display screen of the display device, and when a winning result is obtained in the lottery, a combination of specific symbols etc. is finally displayed on the display screen. In addition to this, there is known a configuration for shifting to a special gaming state advantageous to the player (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). The drawing of the transition to the special gaming state based on is drawn with a predetermined probability each time the ball enters the ball entry part, and while the variable display corresponding to this drawing or this drawing is being performed, Entry to the ball entry occurs In this case, it is common to store the information for the specified number which has been determined in advance, and then the lottery or the variable display is performed based on the information. If it is stored, even if the ball enters the ball entry section, the transition lottery to the special game state can not be received, which may cause a disadvantage to the player, and thus the fun of the game is reduced. Therefore, there is still room for improvement in terms of improving the interest of the game. "

Feature C1. Launching means (launch operation device 28) for launching game balls toward the gaming area (playing area PE) by being operated by the player;
A ball entering portion (through gate 35A) capable of entering a game ball which is shot by the shooting means and which flows down the game area;
Information acquisition means (function of executing information acquisition processing on the special view side by the main control device 71) for acquiring special information when the game ball enters the ball entry section;
Acquisition information that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number (PS1 = 1 in the first to third embodiments, PS2 = 4 in the fourth embodiment) as the upper limit Storage means (in the first to third embodiments, a function of executing the processing of step S901 to step S905 by the main controller 71; in the fourth embodiment, the processing of step S2906 to the step S2910 by the main controller 71) Function to execute)
In the assignment correspondence result corresponding to giving the player the first benefit (the opening / closing execution mode of the per-main mode based on becoming the per-main result A) for each special information stored in the acquired information storage means The first privilege giving means (a special power by the main control device 71 in the fourth embodiment) for giving the first benefit if the provision determination as to whether or not there is sequentially made and the determination result is the assignment corresponding result Function to execute processing during confirmation),
In a gaming machine provided with
A game machine characterized by comprising means for counting the number of game balls entering the ball in the ball entry portion (function to execute the processing of step S2701 to step S2703 by the main control device 71).

  According to the feature C1, the special information is acquired by causing the ball to enter the gaming ball, and the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means until the predetermined number is reached. That is, even after the predetermined number is reached, the special information is not acquired even if the ball is allowed to enter the ball. On the other hand, the counting of the number of gaming balls entering the ball entry section continues even after reaching a predetermined number. Therefore, for example, when the number of ball entry reaches a predetermined specific number, it becomes possible to perform some processing, and it is possible to cause the ball entry portion to have a meaning of entering the game ball. Therefore, even in a situation where the number of special information has reached a predetermined number, it is possible to improve the interest.

  The above process may be, for example, a process of giving a bonus to the player, or a process of notifying that the predetermined number has been reached by a predetermined notification means.

Feature C2. The player receives a first benefit (in the first to third embodiments, an open / close execution mode, and in the fourth embodiment, a substantial hit result A) for each special information stored in the acquired information storage means. To determine whether or not the result corresponds to the provision corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode in the per-substantial mode based on the first feature, if the determination result is the result of the assignment corresponding to the first benefit First privilege giving means (function to execute processing during special power determination by main controller 71) to be provided;
If the number of balls entered into the ball entering section reaches a specific number (256), the second benefit (for the first to third embodiments, the opening / closing execution mode, substantially in the fourth embodiment) to the player The second benefit granting means (function to realize the ceiling by the sorting plate 54 of the special character 33) for giving the opening / closing execution mode of the substantial per mode based on the winning result A or the substantial hitting result B) The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that

  According to the above-described configuration, the player can enter the game ball into the ball entry portion, since the determination of whether or not the first benefit can be obtained by entering the game ball into the ball entry portion can be received. To control the launch means. On the other hand, when the special information reaches the predetermined number, the special information is not stored any more, and in such a situation, can the first benefit be obtained even if the game ball is made to enter the ball entry part? It can not receive the grant judgment of no. For this reason, it is not preferable for the player to continue making use of the operation of the firing means, making it useless. However, in the gaming machine of this configuration, since the second benefit is awarded when the number of balls entered to the ball entry portion reaches a specific number, the situation where the special information has reached a predetermined number, that is, the game ball is on Even when entering the ball, even if it can not receive the determination of whether or not to obtain the first benefit, it makes sense to let at least the ball enter. That is, regardless of whether or not the special information has reached the predetermined number, the second bonus that increases the expectation of the benefit grant by reaching the specific number and the ceiling of the specific number reaching are related by letting the ball enter the ball section Since the player can expect to obtain at least one of the first benefit and the expectation of grant of benefits each time, it is possible to improve the interest even if the special information has reached a predetermined number. it can.

  Feature C3. The gaming machine according to Feature C2, wherein the specific number is a number greater than the predetermined number.

  According to the above configuration, the effects described in the feature C2 can be exhibited by the relationship between the predetermined number and the specific number.

Feature C4. Lottery means (a function of executing the processing of step S1004 and step S1006 to step S1008 by the main control device 71) for executing lottery of whether or not to give the second benefit to the player,
The lottery means executes a lottery as to whether or not the second benefit is to be awarded when the number of ball entry into the ball entry section reaches the specific number.
The second benefit granting means is for granting the second benefit to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result corresponding to awarding the second benefit. The gaming machine according to feature C2 or feature C3.

  According to the above configuration, the second benefit is not uniformly awarded when the number of ball entry into the ball entry part reaches the specific number, but is awarded after the lottery by the lottery means. Thereby, the effect of the said feature C2 can be show | played, without raising a ball extraction rate too much.

Feature C5. The first state (guided state) which is provided in the ball entering portion and game balls can easily enter the ball into the ball entering portion, and the ball entering the ball into the ball entering portion is permitted compared to the first state In the second state (non-induction state) where it is difficult to enter the ball in the part, and the switchable variable ball entry means (Puden 35d) that can be switched;
Variable ball entry control means (function to execute generalization common control processing by the main control device 71) that executes switching control to temporarily change the variable ball entering means from the second state to the first state;
Equipped with
As the gaming state, a high frequency state (high frequency support mode) and a low frequency state (low frequency support mode) in which the frequency at which the switching control is performed by the variable ball entry means is relatively high and low are set.
State transition means (main control device for transitioning the gaming state to either the high frequency state or the low frequency state, triggered by the provision of each benefit by the first benefit award means or the second benefit award means 71. A gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C4, characterized in that it has a function of executing a special power termination process according to V.71.

  According to the above configuration, when any one of the first benefit and the second benefit is awarded, the gaming state shifts to the high frequency state or the low frequency state. In the case of the high frequency state, since it is easy to enter the ball in the ball entry section, it becomes easier to receive the determination as to whether or not to obtain the first benefit than in the case of the low frequency state. In the case of high frequency, it is also expected to increase the number of balls entering the ball at the same time. That is, since the number of ball entry in the ball entry section can easily reach the specific number, it is also easy to receive the second benefit. Thereby, a new game can be provided using the configuration of the feature C4.

  Specifically, for example, when the first benefit is given, the player shifts to the high frequency state, and when the second benefit is given, the player shifts to the low frequency state. After obtaining, it is possible to easily make the number of ball entry into the ball entry section reach the specific number and obtain the second benefit. On the other hand, since the transition to the low frequency state is obtained after obtaining the second benefit, it is better to obtain the first benefit by receiving the determination by the determination means than obtaining the second benefit during the high frequency state. It is preferable for the disabled. Therefore, it is not preferable for the player to cause the ball to enter the ball further when the number of memories of the special information reaches the predetermined number during the high frequency state. However, for example, just before the high frequency state ends due to some end condition (time or number of games) other than that each benefit is given, the number of balls entered is specified to obtain the second benefit as described above. It is also preferable to get to Therefore, when the number of stored special information reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to create a case where it is preferable for the player to enter the ball and a case where it is not preferable for the player, thereby achieving diversification of the game. Is possible.

  Furthermore, in the case of this configuration, if the first benefit is obtained at a timing close to the specified number and the number of balls is shifted to the high frequency state, the second benefit is given immediately and then the low frequency state is entered. It will be shifted to the low frequency state without receiving much benefit of the high frequency state (it is easy to receive the grant determination of whether or not to obtain the first benefit) (it is easy to cause the ball to enter the ball). That is, it is easy for the player to receive the benefit of the high frequency state if the first benefit is obtained when the ball entry number is far from the specific number. Therefore, for example, in a configuration in which the number of ball entry into the ball entry unit and the number of times the award determination is performed are displayed on the gaming machine or the game hall, the player actively takes the platform where the ball entry number is far from the specified number. It is assumed that you choose to play a game. Therefore, it is possible to actively play a game, even at a base far from the specified number which tends to be avoided in the gaming machine which can receive a benefit when the number of ball entry reaches the specified number.

  In addition, for example, when the first benefit is given, it shifts to the low frequency state, and when the second benefit is given, it shifts to the high frequency state, and the player gets the second benefit. After that, it is possible to easily and continuously reach the specific number, so that it is possible to continuously obtain the second benefit. In this case, if the first benefit is obtained before reaching the specific number, the transition to the low frequency state is made, so that the number of times of entering the ball into the ball is as much as possible. That is, in the state where the number of memories of the special information is a predetermined number, the launcher is operated to further cause the ball entry portion to enter the ball. In addition, even when the first benefit is obtained and the state is shifted to the low frequency state, the second number is reached when the number of ball entry into the ball entry reaches a predetermined number as described in at least the feature C2. Since a privilege can be obtained, when the number of memories of the special information is a predetermined number, the significance of having the ball enter the ball is maintained.

  As described above, it is possible to create a new game using each benefit and each frequency state, and by providing these new games, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

  Feature C6. In the high frequency state, the frequency limit state for shifting to the low frequency state (high frequency support mode with frequency limit) is performed by executing the application determination a predetermined number of times (100 times) determined in advance. The gaming machine according to feature C5, wherein the gaming machine is included.

  According to the above-described configuration, the soundness of the game can be improved without excessively increasing the ball-opening rate as compared with the configuration in which transition to a high-frequency state with no limit on the number of award determinations is given after any benefit is awarded. it can.

  Furthermore, with this configuration, it is possible to provide the following new game in relation to the specific number and the predetermined number of times.

  That is, in the number-limited high frequency state, when the number of balls entered into the ball entering part reaches a specific number before the number of times of the determination of assignment reaches the predetermined number, the second benefit is awarded during the number-limited high frequency state, In addition, when the number of ball entry into the ball entry part reaches a specific number after the number of times of the determination of assignment reaches a predetermined number, the second benefit is awarded after transitioning from the frequency limited high frequency state to the low frequency state. In this case, the player receives, for the specified number of times, the determination of whether or not the first benefit can be obtained in the frequency-limited high-frequency state, and obtains the second bonus immediately after the transition to the low-frequency state. Adjust the number of balls entering the ball so that you can. By doing this, it is possible to provide a new game in which the operation of the launcher is adjusted in relation to the specific number and the predetermined number of times.

  In addition, in order to implement | achieve said game, it is good to make predetermined frequency | count the frequency | count smaller than a specific number.

Feature C7. A second means for counting the number of game balls entering the ball entry part in a situation where the number of special information stored by the obtained information storage means has reached the predetermined number (step S2710 by the main control device 71) And a function of executing the process of step S2711),
When the number of balls entered by the second means reaches the second specified number (156), which is a number smaller than the specified number, in the frequency-limited high frequency state, the second specified number is reached. A second notification execution unit (function to execute the processing of step S3206 and step S3207 by the sound light control device 300) for executing notification of the effect;
The gaming machine according to Feature C6, wherein the second specified number is set equal to or less than the number obtained by subtracting the predetermined number of times from the specified number.

  According to the above configuration, the second means counts the number of balls in the case where the award is not made even if the game ball is made to enter the ball entry portion. That is, the number of ball hits is a number that can reduce the number up to a specific number of items for which the assignment determination is not performed in the frequency-limited high frequency state. Further, the number obtained by subtracting the predetermined number of times from the specific number is the maximum value of the number that can be shortened. Since the second specific number for which notification is performed by the second notification execution means is set to less than or equal to this maximum value, the player must grasp that the number that can be shortened in the frequency-limited high frequency state is just the limit. Is possible. As a result, the player can easily perform the game described in the feature C6.

Feature C8. The state transition means is configured to shift the gaming state to the low frequency state of the high frequency state and the low frequency state at a predetermined probability, triggered by the provision of the respective benefits.
The first probability that the state transition means shifts the gaming state to the low frequency state triggered by the provision of the first benefit by the first benefit awarding means is the second probability due to the second benefit conferment means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C5 to C7, wherein the gaming machine is set to be lower than a second probability of shifting a gaming state to the low frequency state in response to the provision of a privilege.

  According to the above configuration, the probability of shifting to the low frequency state is higher in the case where the second benefit is given than in the case where the first benefit is given. That is, when the number of balls into the ball entering the ball reaches a specified number, it is easy to shift to the low frequency state in the subsequent game when the second benefit is awarded, and it is given when the ball is balled into the ball If the first benefit is awarded when the determination is won, it is easy to shift to the high frequency state in the subsequent game. This makes it possible to play a game on a platform far from the specified number without attracting too much attention only to the number of balls entering the ball entering part reaching the specified number in the gaming machine.

Feature C9. The first special ball entry part (the first special winning opening 52) and the second special ball entry part (the second special prize) where the game ball can enter the ball by entering the ball in the ball entry part Mouth 253),
The ball passing area (game ball passing area R) through which the game ball entered into the ball entering section is provided, and the game ball entered into the ball entering section is not entered into the second special ball entering section A first passage (first passage 51a) capable of entering the first special entry portion and capable of entering the first special entry portion and capable of entering the first special entry portion; and the second special entry portion Sorting means (sorting plate 54) for sorting to any of the second passages (second passage 51b) capable of entering the ball in the part;
Equipped with
The distribution means changes the distribution destination of the game ball based on arrival of the game ball entering the ball entry unit, and the specified number of game balls enter the ball entry unit. With which the game ball is made to enter the first special ball entry section,
The information acquisition means acquires the special information on the basis of entering the second special ball entry unit,
The second benefit awarding means is in a state capable of awarding the second benefit based on entering the first special ball entry unit into one of the features C2 to C8. The gaming machine according to 1 or 2.

  According to the above configuration, the gaming ball entering the ball entering section is distributed to the second special entering section before the number of entering balls reaches the specific number, and the first special is reached when the specific number is reached. It is distributed to the ball entry section. And special information is acquired based on the ball entering to the 2nd special ball entering part, and grant determination is performed. In addition, a second benefit is awarded based on entering the first special ball entry part. With such a configuration, the second benefit that increases the expectation of benefit grant by reaching a specific number, and if it is less than a predetermined number, benefits are granted each time the ball enters the ball entrance regardless of the specific number. Can be realized using mechanical operations such as distribution by distribution means.

Feature C10. The distribution means includes n (n ≧ 2) distribution members (for distributing game balls flowing from the upstream side in the ball passage area alternately on the first passage side and the second passage side) For example, with eight distribution plates 54),
The n distribution members are arranged such that when the game balls are distributed to the first passage side by the distribution members in the former stage, the game balls reach the distribution members in the latter stage. ,
When the number of ball entry for the game ball in the ball entry portion reaches the specific number, all the distribution destinations of the game ball for the n distribution members become the first passage side, and the game ball is the first special ball entry portion The gaming machine according to Feature C9, characterized in that the game machine shifts to a state of entering the ball.

  According to the above configuration, n distribution members are provided from the upstream side to the downstream side in the ball passage area, and when the distribution destination of the distribution member in the previous stage is on the first passage side, the distribution member in the latter stage The game ball can reach it. And with the ball entry of the game ball in the ball entry section, the distribution destination of each distribution member changes, and when the distribution destination for all the distribution members becomes the first passage side, the game ball enters the first special ball storage portion Make a ball. In this case, the distribution members of each stage change the distribution destination alternately on the first passage side and the second passage side each time the game balls arrive. Therefore, in order to change the number of game balls required to make all the distribution members of the distribution members all on the first passage side (that is, the number of balls required for ball entry into the first special ball entry portion), the distribution members The design change for entering the ball into the first special ball entry can be easily implemented by changing the number of installation (i.e., "n"). For example, to make it difficult to obtain the second benefit in the gaming machine (to reduce the chance of entering the first special ball entry section), the number of distribution members installed (the number of installation stages) is increased, and the second benefit is obtained. In order to make it easy (to increase the chance of entering the first special ball entry section), it is preferable to reduce the number of distribution members (number of installation stages).

  When alternate switching of two states is performed in each sorting member, the game ball entering the ball entry part enters the first special ball entry part once in 2 n-th turn entry balls It becomes. In other words, the n-th power of 2 becomes the upper limit number of times (ceiling), and if the upper limit number is reached, the gaming ball enters the first special ball entry portion. If n = 8, the ceiling is 2 8 = 256.

  Feature C11. Each of the distribution members is a rocking body pivotally supported pivotably in the ball passage area, and when the game ball is hit, the game ball is swung to switch the distribution destination of the game ball. The gaming machine according to feature C10, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, when the game balls hit the respective distribution members, the distribution destination is switched by the mechanical swinging operation of the respective distribution members. In this case, since the distribution destination by the distribution member is not determined by the electrical processing, the arithmetic processing for switching the distribution destination is unnecessary, and power consumption does not occur at the time of distribution. In addition, since the electric signal is not affected, there is no inconvenience that the distribution destination is operated by an incorrect electric signal.

Feature C12. Drive means driven so as to set the distribution destination of the distribution means to either the first passage side or the second passage side;
Control means for determining the distribution destination of the distribution means and driving the drive means based on the result;
A game machine according to any one of the features C9 to C11, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the distribution destination of the distribution means can be switched by control. Thereby, game contents (specifications) and game effects can be diversified. For example, it is preferable to change the specific number (the number of ball entry required to cause the game ball to enter the first special ball entry part) between the normal state and the high certainty state.

  In the configuration having a plurality of distribution members (distribution plates 54) as distribution means as in the feature C10, the distribution members may be driven independently of each other. In this case, with regard to any of the distribution members, the distribution destination can be fixed to the first passage side by driving of the drive means, or can be fixed to the second passage side. It is possible to change the number of ball entry required to enter the special ball entry part to either the increase side or the decrease side.

  For example, when the distribution destination is fixed to the first passage side for five distribution members among the eight distribution members (distribution plate 54), and the remaining three distribution members are not fixed, the ball receiving portion When the number of ball entry into the game ball in the game becomes "8 (= 2 cube)", the game ball enters the first special ball entry part. That is, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the first special ball entry part at a rate of once per eight passes.

<Feature D group>
In addition, the following feature D group “as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entry area provided in the game area, and a pattern is displayed on the display screen of the display device. The variable display is performed, and when the winning result is obtained by lottery, the combination of the specific pattern etc. is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the configuration is known to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player (See, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-074175.) And, when it shifts to the special game state, for example the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, the ball entry into the ball entry device A large number of game balls are paid out based on the above, and the lottery for transition to the special game state based on the game balls entering the above-mentioned ball entry section is predetermined every occurrence of the ball entry in the ball entry section. Lottery with a probability of Therefore, the expected number of game balls that can be acquired by the player who has continued the game for a long time and the player who finished the game in a short period is the same, and it is feared that the player will be reluctant to continue the game. In view of the technical background and problems, etc.

Feature D1. A ball passage portion (ball passage opening 33a) through which gaming balls shot by the shooting means (the launch operation device 28) and flowing down the game area can pass;
A special winning portion (special winning opening 52) in which winning of the game ball is possible by the game ball passing through the ball passing portion;
It is provided in a ball passing area (game ball passing area R) where passing of the game ball is possible from the ball passing portion to the special winning portion, and the special winning portion wins the game ball passing through the ball passing portion. Distribution means (distribution plate 54) for distributing to any of the possible first passage (first passage 51a) and the second passage (second passage 51b) incapable of winning the special winning portion;
Equipped with
The distribution means changes the distribution destination of the game ball based on arrival of the game ball having passed the ball passage portion, and the predetermined number of game balls are passed along the ball passage portion. A gaming machine characterized by transitioning to a state of winning a game ball in a special winning portion.

  According to the feature D1, when the game ball flows down the game area with the launch operation by the player, the game ball can pass the predetermined ball passing portion, and the game ball can be awarded to the special winning portion Become. In this case, in the ball passage area from the ball passing portion to the special winning portion, the game ball having passed through the ball passing portion is the first passage (the passage which can be won for the special winning portion), and the second passage (special winning portion) Because there is a sorting means for sorting to any of the passages that can not be won, it does not mean that just because the game ball passes through the ball passage part does not all win the special prize part, but the game ball is The special winning portion is awarded only when it is distributed to the first aisle side by the distribution means.

  In particular, the sorting means changes the distribution destination of the game ball based on arrival of the game ball having passed the ball passage portion, and the special winning is achieved as the predetermined number of game balls pass the ball passage portion. It is to shift to the state of winning the game ball in the club. That is, in order to win a game ball in the special winning portion and obtain a predetermined benefit, it is one condition that the ball passing portion passes a predetermined number of game balls. In this case, it is considered that the player who plays the game machine actively continues the game in anticipation that certain benefits will be obtained by passing a predetermined number of game balls in the ball passing portion. This makes it possible to promote the player's continuous game. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest in the game and to increase the player's willingness to play.

Feature D2. The distribution means includes n (n ≧ 2) distribution members (for distributing game balls flowing from the upstream side in the ball passage area alternately on the first passage side and the second passage side) For example, with eight distribution plates 54),
The n distribution members are arranged such that when the game balls are distributed to the first passage side by the distribution members in the former stage, the game balls reach the distribution members in the latter stage. ,
When the number of passing game balls in the ball passing portion becomes the predetermined number, all the distribution destinations of the game balls for the n distribution members become the first passage side, and the game balls win the special winning portion The game machine according to feature D1, characterized in that the game machine is to shift to

  According to the above configuration, n distribution members are provided from the upstream side to the downstream side in the ball passage area, and when the distribution destination of the distribution member in the previous stage is on the first passage side, the distribution member in the latter stage The game ball can reach it. And, with the passage of the game ball in the ball passing section, the distribution destinations of the respective distribution members change, and when the distribution destinations for all the distribution members become the first passage side, the game ball wins a special winning portion. In this case, the distribution members of each stage change the distribution destination alternately on the first passage side and the second passage side each time the game balls arrive. Therefore, in order to change the number of game balls required to make all the distribution members of the distribution members on the first passage side (that is, the number of balls required for winning the special winning portion), the number of the distribution members installed That is, the design change regarding the winning to the special winning portion can be easily implemented by changing “n”). For example, in the gaming machine, to make it difficult to obtain the benefits (decrease the chances of winning in the special winning portion), the number of installment members (number of installation steps) is increased to make it easy to obtain the benefits (to the special winning portion In order to increase the chances of winning, it is preferable to reduce the number of distribution members (number of installation stages).

  When alternate switching of the two states is performed by each sorting member, the game ball that has passed the ball passage portion wins the special winning portion once in 2 n-th ball passages. In other words, the n-th power of 2 becomes the upper limit number of times (ceiling), and if the upper limit number of times is reached, the gaming ball wins the special winning portion. If n = 8, the ceiling is 2 8 = 256.

  Feature D3. Each of the distribution members is a rocking body pivotally supported pivotably in the ball passage area, and when the game ball is hit, the game ball is swung to switch the distribution destination of the game ball. The gaming machine according to the feature D2, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, when the game balls hit the respective distribution members, the distribution destination is switched by the mechanical swinging operation of the respective distribution members. In this case, since the distribution destination by the distribution member is not determined by the electrical processing, the arithmetic processing for switching the distribution destination is unnecessary, and power consumption does not occur at the time of distribution. In addition, since the electric signal is not affected, there is no inconvenience that the distribution destination is operated by an incorrect electric signal.

Feature D4. In addition to the special winning portion, a general winning portion (general winning hole 53) is provided as a winning opening that enables winning by the game ball passing through the ball passing portion.
The special winning portion (special winning opening 52) is a first lottery opportunity winning portion in which a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not a bonus is given to the player as the game ball is won.
The general winning portion is a winning portion in which the lottery process is not executed even if a game ball is won,
The distribution means is characterized in that the game ball is distributed to one of the special winning portion and the general winning portion based on arrival of the game ball having passed through the ball passing portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

  According to the above configuration, when the gaming ball passes through the ball passing portion, a winning on any one of the special winning portion and the general winning portion occurs, and the payout of the gaming ball can be expected with the winning. That is, for the player, some benefit is provided by the game ball passing through the ball passing portion. As a result, the player is prompted to aim the passage of the game ball in the ball passing portion to fire the firing means, and as a result, the number of balls passing in the ball passing portion increases and the special winning portion is made The chance of winning a prize will increase.

  Feature D5. The gaming machine according to Feature D4, characterized in that the winning probability of the lottery process performed when a gaming ball has won in the special winning portion is 50% or more.

  According to the above configuration, the winning probability at the time of winning in the special winning portion (the first lottery opportunity winning portion) is 50% or more, so that a predetermined number of game balls pass in the ball passing portion, The player can obtain benefits with high probability. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to continue the continuous game.

  The winning probability of the lottery process may be 80% or more, or may be almost 100%.

  Feature D6. In the game area, apart from the special winning portion as the first lottery trigger winning portion, a second lottery trigger winning portion (operation opening 34) is provided in which the lottery process is executed along with the game ball winning. The gaming machine according to feature D4 or D5 characterized in that:

  According to the above configuration, even before a predetermined number of game balls pass in the ball passing portion (the ball passing opening 33a), that is, before the game balls win in the first lottery opportunity winning portion (special winning portion) Even in this case, since the lottery process is carried out by the game ball winning in the second lottery opportunity winning part different from the first lottery opportunity winning part, the player in the game has another winning opportunity. Can be given. For example, immediately after the number of ball passes to the ball passing portion reaches a predetermined number and the lottery process is performed, a time gap occurs between the next lottery process, and the player's willingness to continue the game is reduced. If there is a configuration in which the lottery process is carried out by winning in the second lottery opportunity winning portion as described above, it is possible to have the expectation of winning any time, and the player can continue the game It is possible to

Feature D7. A second ball passing portion (through gate 35A) through which the game ball can pass is provided on the upstream side of the first ball passing portion (the ball passing opening 33a) as the ball passing portion in the gaming area, and the game ball is The game ball can pass through the first ball passing portion on condition that it passes through the second ball passing portion,
Whether the player is given a first benefit (game benefit in the open / close execution mode) based on the game ball passing through the first ball passing portion and winning in the special winning portion (special winning opening 52) Lottery means for drawing whether or not to give the player a second benefit (game benefit in the support execution mode) based on the game ball passing through the second ball passing portion while The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D6, comprising (the MPU 82 of the main control device 71).

  According to the above configuration, when the player aims at the first ball passing portion and shoots the game ball, it simultaneously aims at the second ball passing portion. In this case, if the gaming ball passes through the second ball passing portion, a lottery process for the second benefit is performed. In addition, when the game ball passes the first ball passage portion following the second ball passage portion, the game ball wins the special winning portion if the number of ball passages in the first ball passage portion reaches a predetermined number. The lottery process for the second benefit is performed. Here, for the player, the passage of the game balls at each of the above-mentioned passing portions increases the opportunity to obtain not only the second benefit but also the first benefit, thereby increasing the will to continue the game.

Feature D8. It is a gaming machine which determines effect contents based on a lottery result by the lottery means and implements effects by a rendering device (the symbol display device 42) based on the effect contents,
Determined based on the first effect determined based on the lottery result of the first benefit when winning the special winning portion, and based on the lottery result of the second benefit when passing the game ball to the second ball passing portion The gaming machine according to Feature D7, wherein any of the second effects is implemented by the effect device.

  According to the above configuration, the first effect according to the lottery result of the first benefit and the second effect according to the lottery result of the second benefit are respectively implemented by the same effect device. In this case, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the effect is for the first benefit or for the second benefit during the execution of the effect by the effect device. Therefore, at the time of implementation of the rendering of the rendering device, the player can be interested in whether the respective rendering is the first rendering or the second rendering, and can increase the interest in the rendering. In the case where the winning combination to the special winning combination is not directly visible by the player, whether the present effect is based on the winning to the special winning combination (special winning opening 52) or the second ball passing portion (through gate) It is not possible to determine whether the ball 35A) is the ball passing or not, and it is possible to further raise the player's attention to the awarding of the bonus.

  It is preferable that the first effect and the second effect include the same effect form. For example, when fluctuation of the fluctuation symbol is executed in the symbol display device as the effect device, the same fluctuation symbol is changed in both the first effect and the second effect, and only the final determined symbol is the first A symbol for effect and a symbol for second effect.

  In addition, it is preferable that the expected number of winning balls is set larger in the first benefit than in the second benefit. In this case, the player plays a game expecting the generation of the first benefit with a large expected number of winning balls, but from the distribution means in which the effect or the visual recognition in the rendering device is not possible, the first benefit and the first It is not possible to recognize which rendering process of the 2 benefits is currently being executed. As a result, by causing the player to expect the generation of the first benefit, it is possible to further increase the degree of attention to the lottery result.

Feature D9. It has a cover member (cover member 60) which covers the distribution means from the front of the gaming machine,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D8, wherein the cover member makes the sorting means invisible to a player.

  According to the above configuration, the cover member can not visually recognize the distributing means from the front of the gaming machine. As a result, it is determined whether the distribution destination of the distribution means is the first passage (the passage which can be awarded to the special winning portion) or the second passage (the passage which is not able to be awarded to the special winning portion). This can make it difficult for the player to grasp. Although it is impossible for the player to visually recognize the sorting means, it is possible to recognize the presence of the sorting means by the cover member provided in the game area, and the sorting of the gaming balls is performed. It can increase the player's attention.

  Feature D10. In the process where the number of passing game balls passing through the ball passing portion approaches the predetermined number, when the number of passing game balls reaches a predetermined middle number smaller than the predetermined number, to the middle number The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D9, comprising: notification execution means (function to execute step S408 and step S409) for performing notification processing to notify the player of arrival.

  According to the above configuration, the number of passing balls through the ball passing portion gradually increases, and the number of passing balls is a predetermined intermediate number smaller than the predetermined number (the number of balls causing the special winning portion to play the game ball). Is reached, the player is notified that the middle has been reached. As a result, the player can grasp to what extent the game ball will win the special winning portion in the future to a certain extent, and the expectation for the prize can be raised. This also makes it possible to urge the continuation of the game.

Feature D11. Drive means driven so as to set the distribution destination of the distribution means to either the first passage side or the second passage side;
Control means for determining the distribution destination of the distribution means and driving the drive means based on the result;
A game machine according to any one of the features D1 to D10, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the distribution destination of the distribution means can be switched by control. Thereby, game contents (specifications) and game effects can be diversified. For example, it is preferable to change the predetermined number (the number of ball passages required to make the special winning portion win a game ball) between the normal state and the high certainty state.

  In the configuration having a plurality of distribution members (distribution plates 54) as distribution means as in the feature D2, the distribution members may be driven independently of each other. In this case, with regard to any of the distributing members, it is possible to fix the distributing destination to the first aisle side by driving of the drive means, or to fix to the second aisle side, whereby a predetermined number It is possible to change the number of ball passes required to win the club to either the increase side or the decrease side.

  For example, in the case where the distribution destination is fixed to the first passage side for five distribution members among the eight distribution members (distribution plate 54) and the remaining three distribution members are not fixed, the ball passing portion When the number of passing game balls in the game becomes "8 (= 2 cube)", the game balls will be awarded in the special winning portion. In other words, it is possible to make the special winning portion win a game ball at a rate of once per eight passes.

<Feature E group>
In addition, the following feature E group “as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the transition lottery to a special gaming state such as winning is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion provided in the gaming area. In addition to being displayed on the display screen of the display device, the variable display of the pattern is performed, and when the result of the lottery is a winning result, the combination of the specific pattern etc. It is known that a special game state is transferred (see, for example, JP 2005-074175 A.) Here, pachinko machines and the like are required to increase attention to games, and in this respect There is still room for improvement. ”In light of the technical background, issues, etc.

Feature E1. Based on the establishment of the first predetermined condition (the special winning opening 52 or the winning of the gaming ball to the operation opening 34), the first game operation (the first display means (symbol display device 42)) A first game times execution means (a function to execute the special figure electric power control process by the main control device 71, a function to execute the special figure electric power control process by the main control device 71) Function to execute the effect determination process by 300),
Based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition (winning of the game ball on the through gate 35A), the predetermined game means or the other means for the second game use operation (general drawing sub The second game times execution means (a function for executing the computer control routine by the main control device 71, the function to execute the computer control process by the main control device 71, the sound light control device 300) Function to execute the effect determination process),
Equipped with
The first game times execution means determines the operation continuation period (variation display time) of the first game times operation according to the operation state of the second game times operation by the second game times execution means Means (function to execute the processing of step S2005 and step S2008 by the main controller 71 in the second embodiment, function to execute the processing of step S2503 to step S2507 and step S2510 by the main controller 71 in the third embodiment A game machine characterized by comprising

  According to the feature E1, in the gaming machine in which a plurality of game operations are performed, the operation continuation period of one game operation (first game operation) is used for the other game operation (second game) In order to determine according to the operation condition of operation | movement), it becomes possible to give relevance about these game circulation operation | movement. Specifically, for example, one game circulation operation is ended later than the other game circulation operation, is ended earlier, or is simultaneously ended, so that each game circulation operation is used. It is possible to diversify the effects. Therefore, the attention degree to a game can be raised suitably.

Feature E2. A grasping means (second embodiment) for grasping the remaining operation continuation period of the second game cycle operation under execution when the first condition is satisfied in a situation where the second game cycle operation is being executed The function of executing the process of step S2005 by the main controller 71 in the embodiment, and the function of executing the processes of step S2503 to step S2507 by the main controller 71 in the third embodiment);
When the first condition is satisfied in a state where the second game operation is being executed, the determination means grasps the operation continuation period of the first game operation according to the first condition being satisfied. A unit for determining the operation continuation period of the second game-use operation which the unit has grasped (a function for executing the processing of step S2008 by the main control device 71 in the second embodiment, a main control in the third embodiment The gaming machine according to the feature E1, further comprising: a function to execute the processing of step S2510 by the device 71.

  According to the above configuration, if the second game operation is performed at the timing when the first condition is established, the first game operation associated with the first condition is performed for the second game being executed. It is possible to end at the same timing as the operation or at the timing at which the second game routine operation under execution is scheduled to end. As a result, in the gaming machine in which a plurality of game operations having different execution conditions are performed, for example, in the case of a configuration in which the gaming state is changed or the benefit is given after the game operations have been completed, It becomes difficult to tell whether a change in the gaming state has occurred or which benefit has been granted based on the for-use operation (which condition is satisfied). Therefore, it is possible to obscure the result of each of the plurality of game operations, and diversification of the effect is achieved.

Feature E3. A grasping means (second embodiment) for grasping the remaining operation continuation period of the second game cycle operation under execution when the first condition is satisfied in a situation where the second game cycle operation is being executed And a function of executing the processing of step S 3212, step S 3213 and step S 3216 by the main control device 71 in the modification of the embodiment.
When the first condition is satisfied in a state in which the second game operation is being executed, the determination unit determines in advance the remaining operation duration of the second game operation determined by the grasping unit. A means for determining the operation continuation period of the first game switching operation accompanying establishment of the first condition as a predetermined period (variation display time corresponding to the support mode) if it is shorter than a predetermined period A game machine according to feature E1 or feature E2 comprising a function of executing the processing of step S33302 and step S3307 by the main control device 71 in the modification of the second embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, even if the second game operation is executed at the timing when the first condition is satisfied, the remaining operation continuation period of the second game operation is shorter than the predetermined period. In the first game cycle operation, the operation continuation period of the first game cycle operation is determined as a predetermined time period, without using the remaining operation continuation period as the operation continuation period of the first game cycle operation. Is executed. As a result, it is possible to avoid such a disadvantage that the period for performing the first game operation is too short, and it becomes difficult for the player to check the first game operation.

Feature E4. A grasping means (second embodiment) for grasping the remaining operation continuation period of the second game cycle operation under execution when the first condition is satisfied in a situation where the second game cycle operation is being executed And a function of executing the processing of step S3405 and step S3406 by the main control apparatus 71 in a modification of the embodiment;
When the first condition is satisfied in a state in which the second game operation is being executed, the determination unit determines in advance the remaining operation duration of the second game operation determined by the grasping unit. A means for determining the operation continuation period of the first game switching operation accompanying establishment of the first condition as a predetermined period (variation display time corresponding to the support mode) if longer than the predetermined period A game machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that the main control device 71 in the modification of the second embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S3307.

  According to the above configuration, even if the second game operation is executed at the timing when the first condition is satisfied, the remaining operation continuation period of the second game operation is longer than a predetermined period. The first game cycle operation is performed using the operation continuation period of the first game cycle operation as a predetermined period determined in advance without setting the operation continuation period of the first game cycle operation as the remaining operation continuation period. Is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress an event that the period for performing the first game operation is too long and the first game operation is continued indefinitely.

  Feature E5. If the operation for the second game cycle is not performed when the first condition is established, the determination means is associated with the establishment of the first condition for a predetermined predetermined period (variation display time corresponding to the support mode). A unit for determining the operation continuation period of the first game operation (a function for executing the processing of step S2002, step S2006 and step S2008 by the main control device 71 in the second embodiment, main control in the third embodiment A game machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that it comprises a function of executing the processing of step S2502, step S2508 and step S2510 by the device 71.

  According to the above configuration, the second game operation is not performed when the first condition is established, the operation continuation period of the first game operation is not determined, and the first game operation is not performed. It is possible to avoid such inconveniences.

Feature E6. An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on the establishment of the second condition (a function of executing acquisition processing of reservation information on the computer-general side in the third embodiment);
Acquisition information storage means (general drawing reserve area 206) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number determined in advance as a plurality of numbers as an upper limit;
Equipped with
The second game times execution means executes the second game times operation in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
The determination means determines an operation continuation period of the first game cycle operation accompanying the establishment of the first condition according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means when the first condition is established. A method according to any one of the features E1 to E5, comprising special determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S2503 to step S2507 and step S2510 by the main controller 71 in the third embodiment). Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, when there is special information on which the second game circulation operation is performed, the operation continuation time of the first game circulation operation is determined in consideration of the special information. As a result, not only the operation for the second game cycle being executed when the first condition is established, but also the second game cycle operation corresponding to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means when the first condition is established, It becomes possible to associate with the first game cycle operation. As a result, the range of choices for effecting association can be expanded, and diversification of games can be achieved.

Feature E7. The grasping means (the third embodiment for grasping the operation continuation period of the second game operation being executed when the first condition is satisfied in the situation where the second game operation is being executed) Function to execute the processing of steps S2503 to S2507 by the main control device 71 in the embodiment.
When the first condition is satisfied in a state where the second game operation is being executed, the special determination unit continues the remaining operation duration of the second game operation that is recognized by the grasping unit. A period obtained by adding the operation continuation period of the second game operation corresponding to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means to the first A game machine according to Feature E6, characterized by comprising means (function to execute the process of step S2510 by the main control device 71 in the third embodiment) for determining as the operation continuation period of the operation.

  According to the above configuration, the timing at which the second game cycle operation corresponding to the second game cycle operation and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means executed at the time when the first condition is satisfied, and the first game It is possible to coincide with the timing when the circulation operation ends. As a result, in the gaming machine in which a plurality of game operations are performed, for example, when changing the gaming state after the operation of the game operations is finished or providing a benefit, any operation of the game (any of It becomes difficult to understand whether the change in the gaming state has occurred or the benefit has been granted based on the condition establishment). Therefore, it is possible to obscure the result of each of the plurality of game operations, and diversification of the effect is achieved.

Feature E8. The grasping means (the third embodiment for grasping the operation continuation period of the second game operation being executed when the first condition is satisfied in the situation where the second game operation is being executed) A function of executing the processing of steps S2503 to S2507 by the main control device 71 in the embodiment),
Selection means for selecting one special information from the special information stored in the acquired information storage means (a function for executing the process of 2505 by the main control apparatus 71 in the third embodiment);
Equipped with
When the first condition is satisfied in a state where the second game operation is being executed, the special determination unit continues the remaining operation duration of the second game operation that is recognized by the grasping unit. Against the operation continuation period of the second game operation corresponding to the special information selected by the selection means, and the second game operation performed prior to the selected special information. A unit that determines a period obtained by adding the operation corresponding period of the corresponding special information as the operation continuation period of the first game operation associated with the establishment of the first condition (by the main control device 71 in the third embodiment A game machine according to feature E6 or feature E7, comprising: a function of executing the processing of step S2506 to step S2507 and step S2509.

  According to the above configuration, in a state where a plurality of special information are stored, a timing at which the second game operation for the special information selected by the selection means ends and a timing at which the first game operation ends. Can be combined. As a result, in the gaming machine of the feature E7, the range of effect selection is expanded, and diversification of gaming is achieved.

Feature E9. It has a first ball entry portion (special winning opening 52 and operation port 34) and a second ball entry portion (through gates 35A, 35B) capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area,
The first condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry portion,
The second condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entry portion,
In any one of features E1 to E8, the first ball entering portion is provided at a position where the game ball having entered the second ball receiving portion in the game area can enter the ball. Of gaming machines.

  According to the above configuration, a game ball flowing down the game area may enter the second ball entry unit, and the game ball may further enter the first ball entry unit. Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied after the second condition is satisfied, the first game operation is started after the second game operation is started. As described in the feature E1, since the operation continuation period of the first game operation is determined according to the operation status of the second game operation, if this configuration is adopted for the feature E1, the second ball entry unit The operation continuation period of the first game circulation operation can be changed according to the length of the flow-down path of the game ball from the first to the first ball entry portion. As a result, it becomes possible to associate the operation continuation period of the plurality of game operations and the flow-down path of the game ball to design the effect, the range of the effect design is expanded, and the attention of the game is improved. it can.

Feature E10. A game ball which is provided in a ball passage area (game ball passage area R) where passage of game balls is possible from the second ball entering portion to the first ball entering portion, and the ball is entered into the second ball entering portion Distribution means for distributing to either the first passage (first passage 51a) to enter the first ball entry portion or the second passage (second passage 51b) not to enter the first ball entry portion (Sorting plate 54),
Grasping means for grasping which one of the first passage and the second passage the distributing means distributes the game ball (steps S1710 to S1714 by the main control device 71 in the second and third embodiments) And a function of executing the processing of step S2311 to step S2314),
The gaming machine according to feature E9, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, it can be changed by the distribution means whether or not the game ball entered into the second entry part is entered into the first entry part, and grasped by the grasping means be able to. That is, when the second condition is satisfied, that is, when the second game operation is started, it is possible to grasp whether the first condition is satisfied and the first game operation is performed thereafter. . Thus, in the configuration in which the operation continuation period of the first game operation is determined according to the operation status of the second game operation, the operation continuation period of the second game operation is made in advance (the first game operation It is possible to make adjustments (prior to determining the operation duration of Therefore, it is possible to suitably implement the first game cycle operation and the second game cycle operation.

Feature E11. The transition determining means (determining that the main control device 71 starts the special view change start process) determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the first condition. Function to execute)
The game state after the end of the first game cycle operation based on the judgment result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means being the transition correspondence result corresponding to the transition of the gaming state to the special gaming state Game state transition means (a function of executing processing during special drawing determination by the main control device 71) for transitioning the game state to the special game state;
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E10, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, it is determined whether or not to shift to the special gaming state when the first condition is satisfied, and if the determination result of the shift determination is the transition correspondence result, the first game cycle operation After the end of the transition to the special game state. Then, since the operation continuation period of the first game operation is determined according to the operation status of the second game operation, the transition timing to the special game state based on the establishment of the first condition is the second game operation. It will be determined according to the operating condition of the operation. This makes it possible to associate the operation status of the second game switching operation with the point that the player is interested in transitioning to the special game state advantageous to the player. Thus, the degree of attention of the operation status of the second game operation can be increased.

Feature E12. The first game cycle operation and the second game cycle operation are both performed by the predetermined notification means,
The first game times execution means ends the first game times operation as a stop result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means,
Based on the fact that the first condition is satisfied in the situation where the second game operation is being performed, the second game operation being executed by the notification means is used as the first game operation. The gaming machine according to the feature E11, further comprising replacement means (a function of executing the process of step S2113 by the sound and light control device 300 in the second embodiment).

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which a plurality of game operations are performed, each game operation is not performed by separate notification means but performed by a common notification means. There are cases where the operation is duplicated. In particular, since the first game cycle operation reflects the determination of transition to the special game state, the contents are largely related to the profit for the player. Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied in the situation where the second game operation is being performed, by making the second game operation being executed by the replacement means the first game operation, It is possible to promptly notify the player of information related to the profit.

Feature E13. The transition determining means (determining that the main control device 71 starts the special view change start process) determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the first condition. Function to execute)
The game state after the end of the first game cycle operation based on the judgment result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means being the transition correspondence result corresponding to the transition of the gaming state to the special gaming state Game state transition means (a function of executing processing during special drawing determination by the main control device 71) for transitioning the game state to the special game state;
Equipped with
The first game cycle operation and the second game cycle operation are both performed by the predetermined notification means,
The first game times execution means ends the first game times operation as a stop result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means,
Grasping means for grasping whether or not the first condition is satisfied thereafter based on the satisfaction of the second condition (steps S1710 to S1714 and steps S2311 to S2311 by the main controller 71 in the second and third embodiments) Function to execute the process of step S2314),
The second game times execution unit corresponds to the determination result of the transition determination by the transition determination unit when it is determined that the first condition is satisfied thereafter based on the establishment of the second condition by the determination unit. A unit for executing the second game operation according to the establishment of the second condition so as to obtain a stop result (a function for executing the processing of step S 1812 or step S 2413 by the main control device 71 in the second and third embodiments A game machine according to any one of features E1 to E11, characterized in that it comprises

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which a plurality of game operations are performed, each game operation is performed not by different notification means but by a common notification means. There are cases where the operation is duplicated. In particular, since the first game cycle operation reflects the determination of transition to the special game state, the contents are largely related to the profit for the player. Therefore, when it is determined by the grasping means that the first condition is satisfied thereafter, the transition determination is not performed at the time of the grasping by the grasping means (when the second condition is satisfied), but The second game cycle operation corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination accompanying the establishment of the first condition is performed. As a result, it is possible to promptly notify information related to the player's profit.

  Feature E14. The stop result of the operation for the second game run performed by the second game times execution unit is a stop result when the determination result of the shift determination by the shift determination unit is the shift corresponding result The game machine according to Feature E13, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, the second game times execution unit executes the second game switching operation so as to be the stop result of the transition response result. In this case, although there is a possibility that the result of the transition determination by the subsequent transition determination means will not be the transition response result, the player is expected to be the transition response result and pays attention to the game transfer operation It is possible to increase the degree.

  Feature E15. The gaming machine according to Feature E14, wherein the winning probability of the transition determination by the transition determining unit is 50% or more.

  According to the above configuration, 50% or more of the transition determination is the transition response result, so when the second game times execution unit executes the second game operation, the transition is performed regardless of the transition determination of the transition response result. Even if the second game switching operation is started so as to result in the stop of the response result, it is possible to reduce the event that is not the transition response result thereafter. As a result, although the stop result of the second game cycle operation corresponds to the transition response result, the decision result of the transition decision means is not actually shifted to the special game state unlike the transition response result. The events can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce confusion and discouragement given to the player.

  The higher the winning probability of the transition determination, the better, and more preferably 100%.

  The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-described features can be applied will be shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball firing means for firing game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the fired game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine comprising: each gaming component arranged in an area, and providing a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of the gaming components.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 24 ... game board, 27 ... game ball launch mechanism, 28 ... launch operation device, 32 ... special power prize device, 32a ... large winning opening, 33 ... special character, 33a ... ball passing opening, 35A ... through Gate, 35c: detection sensor, 35d: common electric utility, 42: symbol display device, 42a: display screen, 51a: first passage, 51b: second passage, 54: distribution plate, 55: pivot shaft, 56 ... Taper part, 60 ... Cover member, 81 ... Main control board, 82 ... MPU, 102 ... Special figure reservation area, 106 ... Common figure reservation area, 107 ... Execution area, 204 ... Second special figure reservation area, 206 ... Figure reserve area, 224 ... game board, 253 ... second special winning opening, 300 ... sound light control device, 302 ... MPU, 400 ... display control device, 402 ... MPU, A ... substantially per result, B ... substantially per result, PE ... game area.

Claims (1)

Game time execution means for causing the game notification operation to be started by the predetermined notification means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and ending the game operation as the predetermined stop result;
And determining means for determining an operation continuation period of a specific operation to be executed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means according to the operation situation of the game circulation operation by the game times execution means.
The specific operation is started based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, and the specific operation is ended as a predetermined stop result,
The specific condition is satisfied in part when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
Specifying means capable of specifying whether or not the specific condition is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition before the specific condition is satisfied;
A grasping means for grasping the remaining operation continuation period of the game circulation operation under execution based on the specification that the specific condition is satisfied by the specification means in the situation where the game circulation operation is being executed When,
Equipped with
When the determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied by the specifying means in a situation where the game switching action is being performed, the remaining operation duration of the game switching action that the grasping means has grasped Means for determining the operation continuation period of the specific operation based on the establishment of the specified specified condition as one of the plurality of predetermined periods set in advance, when A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images